Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 320506-A, January 2006

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortel.com

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2006 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 320506-A. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Nortel Application Switch Operating System, Nortel Application Switch 2424, Nortel Application
Switch 2424-SSL, Nortel Application Switch 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Nortel Application Switch 180, Nortel Application Switch 180e, Nortel Application Switch 184, Nortel Application Switch AD3, Nortel Application Switch AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2
320506-A, January 2006

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Who Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 How This Book Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 How to Get Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 The Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting to the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Establishing a Console Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Establishing a Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Using a BOOTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Running Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Establishing an SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Running SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Accessing the Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 CLI Versus Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Command Line History and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 First-Time Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Information Needed For Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Starting Setup When You Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Stopping Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Restarting Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
3
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setup Part 3: VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 IP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Default Gateways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setup Part 5: Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Optional Setup for SNMP Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Optional Setup for Telnet Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Setting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the Default Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the Default User Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . 51 Menu Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 The Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Menu Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Global Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Command Line History and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Command Line Interface Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Command Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Command Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tab Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuration Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 The Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 SNMPv3 System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 SNMPv3 View Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SNMPv3 Access Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 SNMPv3 Group Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SNMPv3 Community Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information . . . . . . . . . . 70 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information . . . . . . . . 71 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 SNMPv3 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

General System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Show System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Show Last 64 Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Last 64 Saved Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Management Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 SONMP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 System Capacity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Show switch fan status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show switch temperature sensor status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show encryption licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Show current user status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 System Information Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Layer 2 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Layer 2 FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Show All FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu . . . . . . . . 93 LACP Aggregator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 LACP Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 LACP Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Show common internal spanning tree (CIST) information . 101 Trunk Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Status of port teams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Layer2 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Layer3 Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 IP Routing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Show All IP Route Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

IPv6 Routing Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ARP Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Show All ARP Entry Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ARP Address List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

5

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BGP Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 BGP Peer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 BGP Summary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Dump BGP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 OSPF Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 OSPF General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 OSPF Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 OSPF Database Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 OSPF Information Route Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 OSPF Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 IP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 VRRP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Layer3 Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Layer 4 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Session Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications . . . . . . 135 Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Global SLB Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Show All Layer 4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Bandwidth Management Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 BWM IP User Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 BWM Contract Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Security Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Link Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Software Enabled Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Information Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
The Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 System statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Port Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Bridging Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Interface Protocol Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Link Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

RMON Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Port Dump Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Port mirroring statistics menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Layer 2 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 FDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 LACP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Spanning Tree Group Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Layer 3 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 OSPF Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 OSPF Global Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 IP6 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Route Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ARP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 VRRP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 DNS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ICMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 SP Real Server Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 SP Filter Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 SP Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Global SLB Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Real Server Global SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Global SLB Site Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Real Server SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Per Service Octet Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Real Server Group Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Virtual Server SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Filter SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Layer7 Redirection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

7

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Layer7 Pooling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu. . . . . 220 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics. . . . . . . . . 221 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 FTP SLB Statistics Dump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 RTSP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 DNS SLB Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 WAP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 SLB Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 SIP SLB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Display Workload Manager SASP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Clear Workload Manager SASP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display Workload Manager SASP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 BWM Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 BWM Switch Processor Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu . . . . . 233 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics . . . . . . 233 BWM Contract Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 BWM Contract Rate Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 BWM History Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 BWM Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 BWM IP Users Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Security Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DOS Attack Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Types of DOS Attacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

IP Access Control List Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 UDP Blast Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 UDP Blast Dump Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 UDP Pattern Match Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Rate Limiting Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Dump Statistics for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Management Processor Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 MP Packet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 UCB Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
8 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

MP-Specific SFD Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 CPU Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 SP Specific Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 CPU Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Management Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Dump Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Viewing Pending Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Applying Pending Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 System Host Log Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Seven Levels of Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Management Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Management Port Link Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 RADIUS Server Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration . . 273 System SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 User Security Model Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 278 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu280 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu . . . . . 283 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu . . 284 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 285 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . 286 System Health Check Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 System Access Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Management Networks Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Port Management Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

9

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

User Access Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 System User ID Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 SSH Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 XML Configuration Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Example of enabling or disabling XML access . . . . . . . 299 Configure the Timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 Series . . . . . . 302 Fast Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 SFP GBIC Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Port Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Nortel Application Switch 3000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Port Configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408. . . . . . . . . 306 Single-Mode ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Dual-Mode Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . 313 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu . . . . 314
Temporarily Disabling a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Port Mirroring Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Port-Mirroring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Bandwidth Management Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration . . . . . . . . 319 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu . . . . . 320 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 322 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu . . . . . 323 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration . . . . . . . . . 324 Layer 2 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 CIST Bridge Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Current configuration for CIST Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Spanning Tree Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
10 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Spanning Tree Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 LACP Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Port Team Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Layer 3 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 IP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Default IP Gateway Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Default Gateway Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

IP Static Route Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ARP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ARP Static Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Local Network Route Caching Definition . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache . . . . . . . .351

Network Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Route Map Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 IP Access List Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Autonomous System Filter Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Routing Information Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 RIP Interface Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Open Shortest Path First Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Area Index Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 364 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. . . . . . 370 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 BGP Peer Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 377 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Domain Name System Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . 380
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

11

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Virtual Router Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration . . . . . . . 385 Virtual Router Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Virtual Router Group Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration . 392 VRRP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 VRRP Tracking Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Default Gateway Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Security Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Port Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu . . . . . 400 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Anomaly and Denial of Service Attack Prevention Menu . . 403 Pattern Matching Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 SSL Processor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Saving the Active Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
The SLB Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Real Server SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Real Server Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Buddy Server Health Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Real server IDS Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Real Server Group SLB Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
SLB Health Check Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Server Load Balancing Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Virtual Server SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Virtual Server Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 WTS Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 HTTP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
12 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SIP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 RTSP Load Balancing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Cookie-Based Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

SLB Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Advanced Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 802.1p Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 IP Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
ICMP Message Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 457 Layer 7 SIP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Proxy Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu. 462 Port SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Global SLB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 GSLB Remote Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . 469 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Web Cache Redirection Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu . . . . . . 475 SDP Mapping Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 WAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Peer Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu . 483 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu . . . . . . . 484 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu . . . . . 485 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu . . . . . . . 486 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . 486 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 SNMP Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 WAP Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

13

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

WSP Content Health Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu . . . . . . . . . 495 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 WorkLoad Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
The Operations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

Operations Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Operations-Level Port Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Operations-Level SLB Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Real Server Group Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Global SLB Operations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Operations-Level VRRP Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options . . . . . . . . . 505 Security Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 IP ACL Operations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Operations-Level IP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Operations-Level BGP Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Activating Optional Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Removing Optional Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
The Boot Options Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511

Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Scheduled Reboot of the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Scheduled Reboot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Updating the Switch Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Downloading New Software to Your Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Selecting a Software Image to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Selecting a Configuration Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Resetting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 The Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 System Maintenance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Forwarding Database Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 ARP Cache Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 ARP Entries on a Single Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

14

Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

IP Route Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 IPv6 Manipulation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Debugging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Uuencode Flash Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 System Dump Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Clearing Dump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Panic Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Unscheduled System Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 The SSL Processor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Login to the SSL processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 SSL Processor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 SSL Performance information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 SSL Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 SSL Performance Statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 SSL Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 SSL Performance SSL Local Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 543 SSL Performance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu. . . . . . . 544 IPSEC Statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 SSL Performance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . 546 SSL Performance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu . . . . 547 AAA Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 SSL Performance Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 SSL Configuration Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu . . . . . . . . . 554 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu. . . . . . . . . . . 555 SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu . . . . . . . . . . 556 SSL Configuration Server-specific Advanced Menu . . . . . . 557 SSL Configuration Server Advanced String Menu . . . . . . . 558 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu559 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Local VIP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

15

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 571 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu. . . 572 SSL VPN Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 SSL VPN Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 SSL VPN Configuration TunnelGuard Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 576 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Menu . . . . . . . . . . 578 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Menu . . . . 579 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Macro Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Advanced Menu. . 582 SSL VPN Configuration Network Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 SSL VPN Configuration Network Subnet Menu . . . . . . . . . 583 SSL VPN Configuration Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Menu . . . . . . 585 SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Paths Menu . 587 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu . . . . . . 591 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu . . . . . . 592 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu . . . . . . . 595 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Enabled Domains Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

16

Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu . . . . . . 602 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu . . . . . . 603 SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP Settings Menu . . . . 606 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu . . . . . 609 SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . 609 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Menu . . . . . . 611 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect verify Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Menu . . 614 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Diffie-Hellman Group Mask Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile NAT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 SSL VPN Configuration IP Pool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Contents
320506-A, January 2006

17

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu . . . . . . . 621 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu . . . . . . . . . 622 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu . . . 623 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Setting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DNS settings Menu . . . 627 SSL Configuration System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 SSL Configuration System Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu . . . . . . . . . . 630 SSL Configuration System Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Routes Menu . . . 632 SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 SSL Configuration System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 SSL Configuration System Time Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 SSL Configuration System Time NTP servers Menu. . . . . . 634 SSL Configuration System DNS settings Menu. . . . . . . . . . 634 SSL Configuration System DNS Servers settings Menu . . . 635 SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . 636 SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu. . . . . . . . 636 SSL Configuration System Access List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 637 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2 MIB SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
18 Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Known Host keys Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 SSL Configuration System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 SSL Configuration Language Support Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 SSL Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 SSL Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 SSL Performance Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 SSL Performance HSM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 LOG_WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 LOG_ALERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 LOG_CRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 LOG_ERR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 LOG_NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 LOG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent . 667 Performing a Serial Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Contents
320506-A, January 2006

19

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

20

Contents
320506-A, January 2006

Preface
The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software with your Nortel Application Switch. For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model.

Who Should Use This Book
This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts, IP addressing, the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration parameters.

How This Book Is Organized
“The Command Line Interface” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. “First-Time Configuration” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. “Menu Basics” provides an overview of the menu system, including a menu map, global commands, and menu shortcuts. “The Information Menu” describes how to view switch configuration parameters. “The Statistics Menu” describes how to view switch performance statistics. “The Configuration Menu” describes how to configure switch system parameters, ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP Routing, Port Trunking, and more.

21
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

“The SLB Configuration Menu” describes how to configure Server Load Balancing, Filtering, Global Server Load Balancing, and more. “The Operations Menu” describes how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features. “The Boot Options Menu” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images, how to load a new software image, and how to reset the software to factory defaults. “The Maintenance Menu” describes how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information, how to clear it, and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database. Appendix A, “Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages” presents a listing of syslog messages. Appendix B, “Nortel Application Switch Operating System SNMP Agent” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) supported in the switch software. Appendix C, “Performing a Serial Download” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book.

Related Documentation
Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide (Part Number 320507-A) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (Part Number 320508-A) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. Nortel Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (Part Number 315396-E) Provides a description of the Nortel Application Switch hardware, the physical features, how to install it, and how to troubleshoot it.

22

Preface
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Release Notes (Part Number 320509A). This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations, if any, in the software.

Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. Table 1 Typographic Conventions
Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands, files, and directories used within the text. Example View the readme.txt file.

It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. Main# sys

<AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session, enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. Do not type the brackets. This also shows book titles, special terms, or words to be emphasized. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Do not type the brackets. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. host# ls [-a]

Preface
320506-A, January 2006

23

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

How to Get Help
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance. If you purchased a Nortel service program, contact one of the following Nortel Technical Solutions Centers:
Technical Solutions Center Europe, Middle East, and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000

North America Asia Pacific China

Additional information about the Nortel Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www.nortelnetworks.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel products and services. When you use an ERC, your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service. To locate an ERC for your product or service, refer to the following URL: http://www.nortelnetworks.com/help/contact/erc/index.html

24

Preface
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 1

The Command Line Interface
Your Nortel Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. The extensive Nortel Application Switch Operating System switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in, text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Application Switch Element Manager (ASEM) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Nortel Application Switch Operating System Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any necessary configuration. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the switch.

25
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Connecting to the Switch
You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network

Establishing a Console Connection
Requirements
To establish a console connection with the switch, you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters
Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None

A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics).

Procedure
1. 2. 3. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable. Power on the terminal. To establish the connection, press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. (For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 47).

26

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing a Telnet Connection
A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. To configure the switch for Telnet access, you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. The switch must have an IP address. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically, from a BOOTP server on your network Manually, when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 36). NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH, using serial connection, before you can use these methods of accessing the switch. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 27.

Using a BOOTP Server
By default, the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. If you have a BOOTP server on your network, add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 63). NOTE – If connecting to the management port, BOOTP is not supported. The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address.

Running Telnet
Once the IP parameters on the Nortel Application Switch are configured, you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command, followed by the switch IP address:
telnet <IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 28.

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

27

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Nortel Application Switch via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.) F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.

Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Nortel Application Switch, you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>

28

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.

Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Nortel Application Switch. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Nortel Application Switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Nortel Application Switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Nortel Application Switch. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 47.

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

29

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Password user

SLB Operator

The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, including filters and bandwidth management. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Nortel Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. slbadmin

Layer 4 Operator

Operator

SLB Administrator

Layer 4 Administrator

l4admin

Administrator

admin

NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.

30

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

CLI Versus Setup
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu options will not be available.

Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see “Menu Basics” on page 53.”

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 261.

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

31

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

32

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 2

First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Nortel Application Switch Operating System software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch, you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch.

Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.

Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
33
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address, subnet mask, and broadcast address, and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not

Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 1. Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:

2.

Enter admin as the default administrator password. If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to Nortel Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12, 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:

NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 515.

34

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

35

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.

Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup

Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management port, Port Speed/Mode, VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]

1.

Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System23.0.2 Application Guide. Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.

2.

Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter year [2004]:

Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.

36

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter month [4]:

Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>. 4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [12]:

Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>. 5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:

Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>. 6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:

Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>. 7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:

Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12, 2004.

8.

Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]:

disabled

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

37

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

If available on your network, a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually. BOOTP must be disabled however, before the system will prompt for IP parameters. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP, or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 9. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt:
Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n]

Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree, or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on.

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration
NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2424. When configuring port options for other switches, some of the prompts and options may be different. 1. If desired, set up the management port:
Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y

If you answer y to configure the management port, you will be prompted for IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway, and other management port options. 2. Select the port to configure, or skip port configuration at the prompt:
Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28)

If you wish to change settings for individual ports, enter the number of the port you wish to configure. To skip port configuration, press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 41.

38

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

3.

If appropriate, configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]:

Enter the port speed from the options available, or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 4. If appropriate, configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"]

Enter full for full-duplex, half for half-duplex, or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 5. If appropriate, configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:

Enter rx to enable receive flow control, tx for transmit flow control, both to enable both, or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 6. If appropriate, configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:

on

Enter on to enable autonegotiation, off to disable it, or press <Enter> to keep the current setting.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

39

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

7.

If appropriate, configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:

Enter rx to enable receive flow control, tx for transmit flow control, both to enable both, or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 8. If appropriate, configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:

on

Enter on to enable port autonegotiation, off to disable it, or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. 9. If configuring VLANs, enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1, the system prompts:
Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]:

Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 10. The system prompts you to configure the next port:
Enter port number:

When you are through configuring ports, press <Enter> without specifying any port. Otherwise, repeat the steps in this section.

40

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 3: VLANs
If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1, skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 42. 1. Select the VLAN to configure, or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt:
VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090, NULL at end:

If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs, enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. To skip VLAN configuration, press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 42. 2. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt:
VLAN is newly created. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name, without quotes:

Entering a new VLAN name is optional. To use the pending new VLAN name, press <Enter>. 3. Enter the VLAN port numbers. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN:
Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line, NULL at end:

Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. The right angle prompt appears:
>

For each additional port in the VLAN, type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN, press <Enter> without specifying any port. 4. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN:
VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090, NULL at end:

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

41

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. When all VLANs have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.

Setup Part 4: IP Configuration
If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1, skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps. Otherwise, if you disabled BOOTP, the system prompts for IP parameters.

IP Interfaces
IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration, and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). 1. Select the IP interface to configure, or skip interface configuration at the prompt:
IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256)

NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces, enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. To skip IP interface configuration, press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 43. 2. For the specified IP interface, enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation:
Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0.0.0.0

To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 3. At the prompt, enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation:
Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0.0.0.0

42

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 4. At the prompt, enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation:
Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0.0.0.0

To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 5. If configuring VLANs, specify a VLAN for the interface. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1:
Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1

Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs, or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. 6. At the prompt, enter y to enable the IP interface, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable IP interface? [y/n]

7.

The system prompts you to configure another interface:
Enter interface number: (1-256)

Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. When all interfaces have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any interface number.

Default Gateways
1. At the prompt, select a default gateway for configuration, or skip default gateway configuration:
IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259)

Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. To skip default gateway configuration, press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 44.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

43

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

2.

At the prompt, enter the IP address for the selected default gateway:
Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0.0.0.0

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation, or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. 3. At the prompt, enter y to enable the default gateway, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable default gateway? [y/n]

4.

The system prompts you to configure another default gateway:
Enter default gateway number: (1-259)

Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. When all default gateways have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any number.

IP Routing
When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch, IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device. Routing on more complex networks, where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Nortel Application Switch, can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. 1. At the prompt, enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing:
Enable IP forwarding? [y/n]

Enter y to enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding, enter n and proceed to Step 2.To keep the current setting, press <Enter>. 2. At the prompt, enable or disable the RIP supply:
Enable RIP supply? [y/n]

44

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 5: Final Steps
1. When prompted, decide whether to restart Setup or continue:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning, or n to continue. 2. When prompted, decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes:
Review the changes made? [y/n]

Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. We recommend that you review the changes. 3. Next, decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt:
Apply the changes? [y/n]

Enter y to apply the changes, or n to continue without applying. Changes are normally applied. 4. At the prompt, decide whether to make the changes permanent:
Save changes to flash? [y/n]

Enter y to save the changes to flash. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point. 5. If you do not apply or save the changes, the system prompts whether to abort them:
Abort all changes? [y/n]

Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete, it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 47.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

45

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Optional Setup for SNMP Support
NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools, such as Nortel ASEM.

NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3, refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 276 of this manual. 1. Enable SNMP and select one of the options.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]:

2.

Set SNMP read or write community string. By default, they are public and private respectively.
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm

3.

Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 46.
>> System# apply >> System# save

Optional Setup for Telnet Support
NOTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. 1. Enable telnet.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena

2.

Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s).
>> System# apply >> System# save

46

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP), enter y to enable the RIP supply. Otherwise, enter n to disable it. When RIP is enabled, RIP listen is set by default.

Setting Passwords
It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. To change both the user password and the administrator password, you must login using the administrator password. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.

Changing the Default Administrator Password
The administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. The default password for the administrator account is admin. To change the default password, follow this procedure: 1. 2. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# /cfg

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

47

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The Configuration Menu is displayed.
[Configuration Menu] sys - System-wide Parameter Menu port - Port Menu pmirr - Port Mirroring Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Menu l2 - Layer 2 Menu l3 - Layer 3 Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security - Security Menu setup - Step by step configuration set up dump - Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg - Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg - Restore current configuration from tftp server

3.

From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys

The System Menu is displayed.
[System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur

-

Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters

48

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

4.

From the System menu, use the following path to select the User menu:
System# access/user

5.

Select the administrator password.
System# user/admpw

6.

Enter the current administrator password at the prompt:
Changing ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required... Enter current administrator password:

NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. 7. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt:
Enter new administrator password:

8.

Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new administrator password:

9.

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:
System# apply System# save

Changing the Default User Password
The user login has limited control of the switch. Through a user account, you can view switch information and statistics, but you can’t make configuration changes. The default password for the user account is user. This password cannot be changed from the user account. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords, as shown in the following procedure.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

49

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

1. 2.

Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# cfg

3.

From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys

4.

Select the user password.
System# access/user/usrpw

5.

Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority.
Changing USER password; validation required... Enter current administrator password:

6.

Enter the new user password at the prompt:
Enter new user password:

7.

Enter the new user password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new user password:

8.

Apply and save your changes:
System# apply System# save

50

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password
The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. Through a Layer 4 administrator account, you can view all switch information and statistics, but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. To change the default password, follow this procedure: 1. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. To change any switch password, you must login using the administrator password. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. 2. From the Main Menu, use the following path to access the user command:
Main# /cfg/sys/access/user

3.

Select the Layer 4 administrator password:
System# l4apw

4.

Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt:
Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required... Enter current administrator password:

NOTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. 5. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt:
Enter new L4 administrator password:

6.

Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new L4 administrator password:

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

51

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

7.

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:
System# apply System# save

52

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 3

Menu Basics
The Nortel Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. In addition, the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. To make the CLI easy to use, the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available, along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands, and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI.

The Main Menu
The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. Some features are not available under the user login.

53
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000-SSL Series.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint ssl diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu SSl Accelerator Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

Menu Summary
Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs, Layer 4 settings, and more. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. Included are port, IF, IP, ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, routing, ARP, DNS, VRRP, and Layer 4 statistics. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service, performing port mirroring, and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software, selecting configuration blocks, and for resetting the switch when necessary.

54

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. SSL Accelerator Menu This menu is used for

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

55

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Global Commands
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. These commands are useful for obtaining online help, navigating through menus, and for applying and saving configuration changes. For help on a specific command, type help. You will see the following screen:
Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping ping6 traceroute history pushd popd

pwd quit revert telnet who

The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . Print current menu .. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first, or command separator ! Execute command from history

Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command ? command or help . or print .. or up / lines diff apply save revert Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. When used without the command parameter, a summary of the global commands is displayed. Display the current menu. Go up one level in the menu structure. If placed at the beginning of a command, go to the Main Menu. Otherwise, this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default is 24 lines. When used without a value, the current setting is displayed. Show any pending configuration changes. Apply pending configuration changes. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. Exit from the command line interface and log out.

exit or quit 56

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device, tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32), msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. By default, the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used, specify the -m or -mgmt option. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 379). Use this command to verify an IP address and interface connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: ping6 <IP6 address> <Interface number> For example: ping6 3001::1234 - for ping6 global unicast address ping6 fe80::201:2ff:feb1:10e2 20 - for ping6 link-local address Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station, maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices), and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. By default, the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used, specify the -m or -mgmt option. As with ping, the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown, but no menus. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. When used without a value, the current setting is displayed. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. By default, the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. If the management port is used, specify the -m or -mgmt option. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands.

ping6

traceroute

pwd verbose n

telnet

history

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

57

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command pushd Action This command stores the current location of the menu tree. Optionally, a new path to change to can be specified. The format is as follows: pushd [<new_path>] This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information.

popd who

58

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Command Line History and Editing
Using the command line interface, you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options
Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands. Repeat the last entered command. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. (Also the up arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. The recalled command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below. (Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. The recalled command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. Move cursor to the end of the command line. (Also the left arrow key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. (Also the right arrow key.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. (Also the Delete key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. Delete one character at the cursor position. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. Redraw the screen. Clear the entire line. Insert new characters at the cursor position.

<Ctrl-n>

<Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

59

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Command Line Interface Shortcuts
Command Stacking
As a shortcut, you can type multiple commands on a single line, separated by forward slashes (/). You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. For example, the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows:
Main# cfg/l2/stg/port

Command Abbreviation
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. For example, the command shown above could also be entered as follows:
Main# c/l2/st/p

Tab Completion
By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>, the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed, that command will be supplied on the command line, waiting to be entered. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line, the currently active menu will be displayed.

Configuration Ranges
Most commands now support the use of configuration ranges. Configuration ranges allow the user to set common parameters on a range of similar items on the switch like ports or VLANs. For example, the command shown below would set the PVID of ports 1 through 10 to 5.
Main# /cfg/port 1-10/pvid 5

60

Chapter 3: Menu Basics
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 4

The Information Menu
You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor-

mation.

/info Information Menu
[Information Menu] sys - System Information Menu l2 - Layer 2 Information Menu l3 - Layer 3 Information Menu slb - Layer 4-7 Information Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Information Menu security - Show Security status link - Show link status port - Show port information swkey - Show enabled software features dump - Dump all information

The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 61, with pointers to where detailed information can be found. Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. To view menu options, see page 63. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. For details, see page 89. l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu. For details, see page 106.

61
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 132. bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. For details, see page 141. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. To view a sample, see page 146. link Displays configuration information about each port, including: Port number Port speed (10, 100, 10/100, or 1000) Duplex mode (half, full, or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto) Link status (up or down) For details, see page 147. port Displays port status information, including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details, see page 149. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For details see page 150. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. For details, see page 150.

62

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys System Information Menu
[System Menu] snmpv3 general time log slog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp encrypt user dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show date and time Show last 64 syslog messages Show last 64 syslog messages saved in FLASH Show management port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Show switch encryption licenses Show current user status Dump all system information

Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. To view the menu options, see page 65. general Displays general system information including: System information like time, day, and date. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware, Management Processor Board Hardware, and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner, if one is configured See page 74 for a sample output. time Displays the current time. log Displays last 64 syslog messages. See page 76 for a sample output and detailed information.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

63

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage slog Displays the last 64 syslog messages that are saved in flash. See page 77 for a sample output. mgmt Displays Management port information. See page 78 for detailed information. sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. See page 79 for detailed information. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2, Layer 3, RIP, OSPF, BGP, Route Maps, Network Filters, VRRP, Layer 4-7, which includes Server Load Balancing, Filters, GSLB, Health Checks, Bandwidth Management, General switch information, and SNMPv3. See page 80 for a sample output. fan Displays the fan status of the switch. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. encrypt Displays the current encryption licenses. user Displays the current user names. dump Displays all system information. See page 84 for a sample output.

64

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3
SNMPv3 System Information Menu
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.
[SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm - Show usmUser table information view - Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access - Show vacmAccess table information group - Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm - Show community table information taddr - Show targetAddr table information tparam - Show targetParams table information notify - Show notify table information dump - Show all SNMPv3 information

Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view the table, see page 66. view Displays information about view, sub tress, mask and type of view. To view a sample, see page 67. access Displays View-based Access Control information. To view a sample, see page 68. group Displays information about the group that includes, the security model, user name, and group name. To view a sample, see page 69. comm Displays information about the community table information. To view a sample, see page 69. taddr Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample, see page 70.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

65

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. To view a sample, see page 71. notify Displays the Notify table information. To view a sample, see page 72. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample, see page 73.

/info/sys/snmpv3/usm
SNMPv3 USM User Table Information
The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol.
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only

Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

66

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm)
Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. Nortel Application Switch Operating System23.0.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.

/info/sys/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Table Information
The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.
View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.3 1.3 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded

Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view)
Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names. Displays the bit mask. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.

Mask Type

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

67

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/access
SNMPv3 Access Table Information
The access control sub system provides authorization services. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name, security information, a context, and a message type, which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view, a write-view and a notify-view. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification.
Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ----------- ------ ---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org

Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access)
Field Group Name Prefix Model Level Description Displays the name of group. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or SNMPv2 or USM. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. For example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv. Displays the match for the contextName. The options are: exact and prefix. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.

Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV

68

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Table Information
A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. The group is identified by a group name.
Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp

Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group)
Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM, SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3. Displays the name for the group. Displays the access name of the group.

/info/sys/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Information
This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.
Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

69

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string, which represents the configuration. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param

Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Displays the transport addresses. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.

70

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model --------------- -------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv

Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.

Sec Level

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

71

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag -------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap

Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.

72

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ ------- -------- -----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- --------------org 1.3 v1v2only 1.3 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask ------------

Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded

vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha

Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

73

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/general
General System Information
On a Nortel Application Switch 2424:
System Information at 6:56:53 Thu Sep 15, 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 3 days, 11 hours, 28 minutes and 34 seconds. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11, 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0.0.0.0 Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No: ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev:

09 00 00 00

Note - When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated. Software Version 23.0.1 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

74

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

On a Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL:
System Information at 6:56:53 Thu Sep 15, 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 3 days, 11 hours, 28 minutes and 34 seconds. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11, 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0.0.0.0 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No:ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev:

09 00 00 00

Note - When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated. Software Version 23.0.1 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

75

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/time
Show System Time
>> Main# /info/sys/time 12:52:49 Fri Jul 8, 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia DST on first Sunday of April at 02:00 DST off last Sunday of October at 02:00

/info/sys/log
Show Last 64 Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1, new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH

Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately

76

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message

/info/sys/slog
Last 64 Saved Syslog Messages
Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 switch reset from CLI

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

77

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/mgmt
Management Port Information
Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up

MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.23.251 255.255.254.0 Gateway information: 47.80.22.1

47.80.23.255

Use this command to display Management port information on an Nortel Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.

78

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/sonmp
SONMP Information
This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table. SONMP protocol is enabled on Nortel Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command, and is necessary so that a Nortel Application Switch can be discovered by the Nortel Enterprise Switch Manager.When SONMP is enabled, devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. As the network devices exchange information, a topology table is built like the one shown below.
Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------- --47.80.23.247 0 47.80.22.1 770 47.80.23.25 259 47.80.23.25 260 47.80.23.241 257 50.10.10.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg ------------------ ----- ----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type

Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description
Parameter Slot Port IP Address Seg ID Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.e. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The current state of the sender of the topology message. the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. new—sending agent is in new state.

Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg State

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

79

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/capacity
System Capacity Information
The following sample output from an Nortel Application Switch 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7.
Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Port Teams Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 1024 12 28 8 16 8 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0)

16(1) 8(0)

256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288

1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued...

80

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Real IDS Servers IDS Server Groups Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule DNS Persistence Cache Entries

16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256

0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0)

0(0) 0(0) 0

1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 62 63 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 100000

0(0) 0 0(0)

0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 100000(100000)

Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 - PORTS Port # Client Server

2048 1024 64 5 1024 1048550 64 64 8

0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0)

Filter

RTS Continued...

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

81

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract Security Configuration source IP ACLs Bogon source IP ACLs Operations source IP ACLs Total source IP ACLs Configuration destination IP ACLs Operations destination IP ACLs Total destination IP ACLs IP DoS attacks prevention TCP DoS attacks prevention UDP DoS attacks prevention ICMP DoS attacks prevention IGMP DoS attacks prevention ARP DoS attacks prevention IPv6 DoS attacks prevention Total DoS attacks prevention UDP ports for UDP blast protection GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries

512 1024 32 8 2

0 1(1) 0

5120 8192 1024 14340 1024 1024 2052 17 18 6 5 3 5 2 56 5000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16

0 0 0 1 0

3 5 2 0 0

82

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/fan
Show switch fan status
>> System# fan Fans OK.

/info/sys/temp
Show switch temperature sensor status
>> System# temp Temperature OK.

/info/sys/encrypt
Show encryption licenses
AOS contains the following encryption licenses: BLOWFISH DES & 3DES MD5 RC4 SHA-1

/info/sys/user
Show current user status
Usernames: user slboper l4oper oper slbadmin l4admin admin enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Always Enabled

Note: there are pending config changes; use "diff" to see them. Current User ID table:

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

83

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/dump
System Information Dump
System Information at 7:02:06 Thu Sep 15, 2005 (DST) Time zone: America/Canada/Atlantic-Nova-Scotia (GMT offset -4:00) Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 3 days, 11 hours, 33 minutes and 48 seconds. Last boot: 18:28:09 Sun Sep 11, 2005 (reset from Telnet) Last apply: unknown Last save: 5 MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 IP (If 1) Address: 0.0.0.0 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Serial No: ABCDE600MJ Rev: Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev:

09 00 00 00

Note - When the measured temperature inside the switch EXCEEDs the high threshold at 62 degree Celsius a syslog message will be generated. Software Version 23.0.1 (FLASH image2), active configuration. Last 64 syslog messages: Sep 12 10:42:19 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:03:13 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:27:48 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 11:54:07 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 12:19:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 12 13:57:54 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:02:58 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:07:27 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:10:03 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:19:44 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 14:59:20 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:08:06 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:09:43 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:15:08 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:15:32 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 15:58:30 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 16:00:02 NOTICE mgmt: Sep 12 17:56:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 12 23:33:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 13 5:10:01 ERROR mgmt: Sep 13 10:47:01 ERROR mgmt: Continued . . .

admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH tcp open error, cannot contact reporting admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 192.168.0.3 admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH tcp open error, cannot contact reporting tcp open error, cannot contact reporting tcp open error, cannot contact reporting tcp open error, cannot contact reporting

server

server server server server

84

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep (5) Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep

13 16:24:00 13 22:01:00 14 3:38:00 14 9:15:00 14 10:23:04 14 10:23:05 needs to be 14 10:23:05 14 10:23:05 14 10:24:45 14 11:30:36 14 11:35:25 14 11:35:40 14 11:39:37 14 11:49:12 14 11:58:20 14 13:41:54 14 13:46:18 14 14:37:07 14 14:52:00 14 14:58:57 14 16:09:44 14 16:20:44 14 16:24:58 14 16:30:51 14 16:48:16 14 16:50:34 14 16:57:47 14 16:57:55 14 17:00:02 14 17:04:59 14 17:05:49 14 17:06:05 14 19:54:04 14 20:00:22 14 20:01:47 14 20:22:49 14 20:23:10 14 20:23:55 14 20:29:00 14 20:40:41 14 21:43:51 15 2:06:00 15 6:56:45

ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 ERROR cli: Error: VLAN 5 doesn't exist; the PVID for port 1 changed ERROR cli: Error: PVID 5 for port 1 is not created ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3

Continued . . .

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

85

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Last 64 syslog messages saved in FLASH: Sep 8 10:44:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 8 10:48:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 10:49:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 8 10:50:18 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 10:57:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 8 10:57:42 ERROR cli: Error: IP interface 2 has no IP address configured Sep 8 10:57:42 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Sep 8 10:58:19 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Sep 8 10:58:20 INFO mgmt: Operational change made by Admin from Telnet:192.168.0.3, login since 10:56:59 Sep 8 10:58:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Sep 8 10:58:44 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 11:09:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 8 11:58:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 13:11:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 8 15:31:08 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 8 15:31:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 8 18:48:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 0:25:00 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 6:02:04 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 9:15:45 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 9 9:23:27 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 10:32:10 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 9 10:33:40 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 11:39:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 13:37:24 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 9 13:37:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 13:38:07 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI. Sep 9 13:38:22 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI. Sep 9 16:00:10 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 9 16:00:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin connection closed from Telnet/SSH Sep 9 17:16:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 9 22:53:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 4:30:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 10:07:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 15:44:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 10 21:21:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 2:58:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 8:35:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 14:12:03 ERROR mgmt: tcp open error, cannot contact reporting server Sep 11 19:21:27 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via TELNET from host 192.168.249.237 Sep 11 19:21:48 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 192.168.0.3 Sep 11 19:25:08 INFO mgmt: image2 downloaded from host 192.168.0.10, file 'AAS-23.0.1.0-2000-AlteonOS.img', software version 23.0.1 Sep 11 19:26:39 NOTICE mgmt: Next boot will use new image2. Sep 11 19:26:52 NOTICE mgmt: switch reset from CLI Continued . . .

86

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Management port information: Speed ----100 Duplex -----half Link ---up

MAC address: 00:03:24:6e:bd:3d Interface information: 192.168.0.13 255.255.255.0 Gateway information: 192.168.0.1

192.168.0.255

Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:01:81:2E:BC:50 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------- ------ ------v1v2grp snmpv1 admingrp usm

Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv

Match -----exact exact

ReadV ---------iso iso

WriteV ---------iso iso

NotifyV -------v1v2only iso

vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- -----------------------------iso 1 v1v2only 1 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm adminmd5 usm adminsha Continued . . .

Mask --------------

Type -----included included excluded excluded excluded

Group Name ------------------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

87

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- -------------------- --------- --------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Local State Port Id Seg ----- --------------- ---- ----------------- ----------------- ----- -------

88

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu
[Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg cist trunk vlan team dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show CIST information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Show port team information Dump all layer 2 information

Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details, see page 90. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu. For details, see page 93. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details, see page 96. cist Display the CIST information. trunk When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. For details, see page 102.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

89

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information, including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details, see page 103. team Show port team information. dump Displays all Layer 2 information.

/info/l2/fdb
Layer 2 FDB Information
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address.
[Forwarding Database Menu] find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port - Show FDB entries on a single port trunk - Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan - Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt - Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump - Show all FDB entries

90

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. Each SP supports up to 8K entries. Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56. You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx. For example, 080020123456. port <port number, 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For more information, see page 92.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

91

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/fdb/dump
Show All FDB Information
MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------- ---- ---- ----- -------------- ------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23

An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by the switch. When in the trunking (TRK) state, the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch, but has only been seen as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown state, no outbound port is indicated, although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.” If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF), the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP), the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server.

Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database
To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB, refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 522.

92

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu
The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System.
[LACP Menu] aggr port dump

- Show LACP aggregator information for the port - Show LACP port information - Show all LACP ports information

Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator. port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port. dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group. To view a sample output, see page 96.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

93

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/lacp/aggr
LACP Aggregator Information
Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address - 00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority - 32768 Actor System ID - 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual - FALSE Actor Admin Key - 300 Actor Oper Key - 300 Partner System Priority - 32768 Partner System ID - 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key - 1 ready - TRUE Number of Ports in aggr - 10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10

94

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/lacp/port
LACP Port Information
port 1
---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled - TRUE lacp_admin_enabled - TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768

Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner

Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state Partner Oper Port state - 0x0

Long FALSE FALSE

Aggregation: Distributing:

TRUE FALSE

Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE

TRUE TRUE

Continued

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

95

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Individual - TRUE Selected Aggregator ID - 0 Attached Aggregator ID - 0 ready_n - FALSE ntt - FALSE selected - Unselcted port_moved - FALSE Collection and Distribution state turned ON! Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state - LACP_RX_INIT_STATE - LACP_MUX_DETACHED_STATE - LACP_PERIODIC_NO_STATE

96

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/lacp/dump
LACP Dump Information
port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

97

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/stg
Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information
When multiple paths exist on a network, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups.
Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300

Hello 2

MaxAge 20

Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128

State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED

Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------- -------

8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80

32773

The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time

98

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either BLOCKING, LISTENING, LEARNING, FORWARDING, or DISABLED.

MaxAge

FwdDel

Aging

priority (port)

Cost

State

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

99

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. The designated port identifies a physical port. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number. For example, a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772.

Designated port

100

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/cist
Show common internal spanning tree (CIST) information
NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups.
-----------------------------------------------------------------Common Internal Spanning Tree: VLANs: 1 4-4094 Path-Cost 0 Path-Cost 0 Port MaxAge FwdDel 0 20 15

Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 Cist Regional Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:bc:50 Parameters:

Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops 32768 20 15 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type ----- ---- --------- ----- ---- ---------------------- -------- ----- ---1 128 20000 DSB 2 128 20000 DSB 3 128 20000 DSB 4 128 20000 DSB 5 128 20000 DSB 6 128 20000 DSB 7 128 20000 DSB . . . 18 128 20000 DSB 19 128 20000 DSB 20 128 20000 DSB 21 128 20000 DSB 22 128 20000 DSB 23 128 20000 DSB 24 128 20000 DSB 25 128 20000 DSB 26 128 20000 DSB 27 128 20000 DSB 28 128 20000 DSB sslpro 128 20000 DISC DESG 8000-00:01:81:2e:bc:50 801d 2 Shared

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

101

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/trunk
Trunk Group Information
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth, multi-link connections between Nortel Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single, larger virtual link. When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.
Trunk group 1, bw contract 1024, port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding

NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding, the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.

102

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/vlan
VLAN Information
VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------- ------ ----- ---- ----- ----Default VLAN ena n 1024 ena 1-28

This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

103

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/vlan
VLAN Information
VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------- ------ ----- ---- ----- ----Default VLAN ena n 1024 ena 1-28

104

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l2/team
Status of port teams
>> Layer 2# team All port teams are disabled.

/info/l2/dump
Layer2 Dump Information
Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300

Hello 2

MaxAge 20

Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128

State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED

Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------- ------

8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80

32773

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

105

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu
[Layer 3 Menu] route route6 arp nbrcache bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu IP6 Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu IP6 Neighbor Cache Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information

Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu, the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes, specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops, or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details, see page 107. route6 IP6 Routing Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 110. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. For details, see page 112. nbrcache IP6 Neighbor Cache Menu. To view menu options, see page 115. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 117. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. For details, see page 119.

106

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ip Displays IP Information. For details, see page 126. IP information, includes: IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, VLAN number, and operational status. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway number, IP address, and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status, lnet and lmask Port status vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu. For details, see page 127. dump Displays all Layer 3 information.

/info/l3/route
IP Routing Information
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show gw - Show type - Show tag - Show if - Show dump - Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes

Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 109.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

107

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route)
Command Syntax and Usage tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-20 on page 109. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.

NOTE – The total number of interfaces on a Nortel Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255.
dump Displays all routes configured in the switch. For more information, see page 108.

/info/l3/route/dump
Show All IP Route Information
Status code: * - best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------- --------------- ------------- --------- ----- -* 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 47.80.22.1 indirect static 1 * 47.80.22.0 255.255.254.0 47.80.23.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.80.23.249 255.255.255.255 47.80.23.249 local addr 1 * 47.80.23.255 255.255.255.255 47.80.23.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 224.0.0.5 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 multicast addr * 224.0.0.6 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 multicast addr * 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast

108

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Type Parameters
The following table describes the Type parameters. Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type)
Parameter indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. Indicates a broadcast route. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Packets to this destination are discarded. Indicates a multicast route.

Tag Parameters
The following table describes the Tag parameters. Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag)
Parameter fixed static addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Nortel Application Switch. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address. The address belongs to a filtered group. Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

109

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/route6
IPv6 Routing Information Menu
This menu provides a mechanism for viewing IPv6 routing information. The IPv6 routing table stores routes it learns from network traffic and pre-configured, static routes. NOTE – Presently there is no mechanism for clearing this IPv6 routing table..
[IP6 Routing Menu] dump - Show all routes

Table 4-21provides a description of this menu. Table 4-21 IPv6 Routing Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route6)
Command Syntax and Usage dump The /info/l3/route6/dump command shows all the IPv6 routes maintained. Since each link-local interface is shown with an entry prefix of /128, the link-local network; such as FE80::/ 10; is not shown for each interface to avoid too many network entries in the table.

110

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The following is an example of output from the /info/l3/route6/dump command.
>> Main# /info/l3/route6/dump IPv6 Forwarding Table: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: Destination: NextHop: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:16 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/64 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 2005:0:0:0:0:0:0:16/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 fe80:0:0:0:201:81ff:fe2e:a100/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00:0/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00:1/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 ff02:0:0:0:0:1:ff2e:a100/128 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto: If:1 Proto:

STATIC LOCAL LOCAL STATIC LOCAL STATIC STATIC STATIC STATIC STATIC

Total number of route6 entries: 10

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

111

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/arp
ARP Information Menu
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP communication, the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find - Show a single ARP entry by IP address port - Show ARP entries on a single port vlan - Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt - Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump - Show all ARP entries help - Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr - Show ARP address list

The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address status flags (see Table 4-23 on page 114), VLAN and port for the address, and port referencing information. Table 4-22 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP. For details, see page 113.

112

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-22 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all ARP entries. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information, see page 114. help Displays help on the ARP field entries. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J - ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P - Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request), e.g. IP interface, VIP, etc. R - Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 - Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u - Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned. MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present

addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN flags.

/info/l3/arp/refpt
Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP
IP address Flags ------------- ----47.80.23.249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------- ---- ----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

113

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/arp/dump
Show All ARP Entry Information
IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------- ----- ----------------- ---- ---1.1.11.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10.10.10.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47.80.22.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47.80.23.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.31.3.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.31.3.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172.31.3.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty

Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry. So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports), this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example). NOTE – If you have VMA turned on, the referenced port will be the designated port. If you have VMA turned off, the designated port will be the normal ingress port. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-23 ARP Dump Flag Parameters
Flag P P 4 R U J Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address. Indirect route entry. Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned. ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN

114

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/arp/addr
ARP Address List Information
IP address --------------10.10.10.10 1.1.11.1 172.31.4.200 172.31.3.1 172.31.4.1 47.80.23.81 IP mask --------------255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags -----

D 1 1 1

/info/l3/nbrcache
IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information
This menu provides a mechanism for viewing IPv6 Neighbor Cache information. IPv6 uses the Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol to discover its neighbors link-layer addresses and neighbor reachabilty. ND can also auto-configure addresses and detect duplicate addresses. ND enables routers to advertise their presence and address prefixes and to inform hosts of a better next-hop address to forward packets. The information collected from ND is stored in the Neighbor Cache. The Neighbor Cache maintains information about each neighbor such as: MAC Address Reachability State Neighbor Type VLAN Ingress Port Neighbor Cache entries are added in a number of situations: 1. 2. 3. Entries are added when an IPv6 Interface or Virtual IP is operational. Reception of ND messages from neighbor. A switch sends ND packets to resolve a link-layer address that it wishes to send packets to.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

115

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

There are 5 reachability states: INCOMPLETE The link-layer address of the neighbor has not yet been determined. REACHABLE The neighbor is known to have been reachable recently. STALE The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable but until traffic is sent to the neighbor, no attempt should be made to verify its reachability. DELAY The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable and traffic has recently been sent to the neighbor. PROBE The neighbor is no longer known to be reachable, and ND messages are sent to the neighbor to verify reachability. The neighbor types are LOCAL and DYNAMIC. The LOCAL neighbor type is for switch pre-configured addresses and DYNAMIC is for neighbor addresses learnt from ND. NOTE – Once the Neighbor Cache table reaches 2000 entries, table entries are replaced by adding the new entry and dropping the 2000th entry off the list. Table entries are kept until the entry is replaced by a new one. During this 2000 full entries period, no new entries will be used to sort for display.
[IP6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol Menu] dump - Show all IP6 neighbor cache entries

Table 4-24 provides a description of this menu. Table 4-24 IPv6 Neighbor Cache Information Menu (/info/l3/nbrcache)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all IPv6 neighbor cache entries.

116

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The following is an example of output from the /info/l3/nbrcache/dump command.
>> IP6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol# IP address State ----------------------------- ----2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 REACH 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 STALE 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:100 REACH 2000:0:0:0:0:0:0:200 REACH fe80:0:0:0:20e:62ff:fef6:b200 REACH fe80:0:0:0:211:11ff:fee3:32b9 STALE fe80:0:0:0:250:daff:fe16:f727 STALE dump Type MAC address VLAN Port --- ----------------- ---- ---LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 DYN 00:50:da:16:f7:27 1 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:0e 1 LOC 00:0e:62:f6:b2:00 1 DYN 00:11:11:e3:32:b9 1 9 DYN 00:50:da:16:f7:27 1 1

Total dynamic neighbor cache entries: 3 Total local neighbor cache entries: 4 Other neighbor cache entries: 0

/info/l3/bgp
BGP Information Menu
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. For more information, refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 257 and the Application Guide.
[BGP Menu] peer - Show all BGP peers summary - Show all BGP peers in summary dump - Show BGP routing table

Table 4-25 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information. See page 118 for a sample output. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message sent, up/down, state. See page 119 for a sample output. dump Displays the BGP routing table. See page 119 for a sample output.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

117

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/bgp/peer
BGP Peer information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.
BGP Peer Information: 3: 2.1.1.1 , version 0, TTL 1 Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0, Local router ID: 1.1.201.5 BGP status: idle, Old status: idle Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2.1.1.4 , version 0, TTL 1 Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0, Local router ID: 1.1.201.5 BGP status: idle, Old status: idle Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0

118

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/bgp/summary
BGP Summary information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.
BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------- - -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------1: 205.178.23.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205.178.15.148 0 148 0 0 never connect

/info/l3/bgp/dump
Dump BGP Information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.
>> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------- --------------- ----- ---- ----*> 10.0.0.0 205.178.21.147 1 256 *>i205.178.15.0 0.0.0.0 * 205.178.21.147 1 128 *> 205.178.17.0 205.178.21.147 1 128 13.0.0.0 205.178.21.147 1 256

Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ?

/info/l3/ospf
OSPF Information Menu
Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple areas, one area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone, which then distributes it to other areas as needed. For more

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

119

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

information on how to configure OSPF on the switch, refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 257 and your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide.
[OSPF Information Menu] general - Show general information aindex - Show area(s) information if - Show interface(s) information virtual - Show details of virtual links nbr - Show neighbor(s) information dbase - Database Menu sumaddr - Show summary address list nsumadd - Show NSSA summary address list routes - Show OSPF routes dump - Show OSPF information

Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information. See page 121 for a sample output. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied, it displays area information for all the areas. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied, it displays information for all the interfaces. See page 122 for a sample output. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. nbr <nbr router-id (A.B.C.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. To view menu options, see page 122. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. routes Displays OSPF routing table. See page 124 for a sample output.

120

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Display all the OSPF information. See for a sample output.

/info/l3/ospf/general
OSPF General Information
OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.80.23.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1, of which 2 are >=INIT state, 2 are >=EXCH state, 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2, of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.0.0.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

121

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/ospf/if
OSPF Interface Information
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2 Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5, Poll interval 0, Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4, Authentication type none

/info/l3/ospf/dbase
OSPF Database Information
[OSPF Database Menu] advrtr - LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum - ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm - LS Database summary ext - External LS Database info nw - Network LS Database info nssa - NSSA External LS Database info rtr - Router LS Database info self - Self Originated LS Database info summ - Network-Summary LS Database info all - All

Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.B.C.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.1. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.1.1. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.

122

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area. b) the total number of LSAs for each area. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined. No parameters are required. ext <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. nw <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.network LS database. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. No parameters are required. summ <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. all Displays all the LSAs.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

123

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/ospf/routes
OSPF Information Route Codes
Codes: IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2 IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2 IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2 IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2 IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2 IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2 IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2 E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2

124

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/ospf/dump
OSPF Dump Information
OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1.1.1.1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no, AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0, of which 0 are >=INIT state, 0 are >=EXCH state, 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0, of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---- ----------

Prio ----

State -----

Address -------

OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1.1.1.1) No areas enabled.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

125

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/ip
IP Information
Interface information: 1: 47.80.23.81 255.255.254.0 2: 172.31.4.1 255.255.255.0 3: 172.31.3.1 255.255.255.0 47.80.23.255, 172.31.4.255, 172.31.3.255, vlan 1, up vlan 1, up vlan 1, up

Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.80.22.1, vlan any, up Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.1.1.1 lsdb limit 0

126

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/vrrp
VRRP Information
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for more information on VRRP.
VRRP information: 10: vrid 10, 10.1.2.200, 11: vrid 11, 11.1.2.200, 12: vrid 12, 12.1.2.200, 13: vrid 13, 13.1.2.200, 14: vrid 14, 14.1.2.200, 20: vrid 20, 20.1.2.200, 27: vrid 27, 27.1.2.200, 28: vrid 28, 28.1.2.200, 100: vrid 100, 172.21.8.100, server 172: vrid 172, 172.21.8.200, 254: vrid 254, 27.1.2.100, server 255: vrid 255, 28.1.2.100, server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if 2: vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if 3: vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if

if if if if if if if if if

10, renter, prio 110, master 11, renter, prio 118, master 12, renter, prio 102, backup 13, renter, prio 118, master 14, renter, prio 102, backup 20, renter, prio 110, master 27, renter, prio 118, master 28, renter, prio 102, backup 172, renter, prio 110, master,

if 172, renter, prio 110, master if 27, renter, prio 102, backup, if 28, renter, prio 118, master,

1, renter, prio 100, master, server 1, renter, prio 100, backup 1, renter, prio 100, master, proxy

When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

127

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. Server status. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Proxy status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers, where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address, minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured.

128

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/l3/dump
Layer3 Dump Information
This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above.
IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45.1.1.201,

AS number 100

Interface information: 2: 45.1.1.201 255.0.0.0 3: 205.1.1.201 255.255.255.0 4: 172.21.1.254 255.255.255.0

45.255.255.255 , 205.1.1.255 , 172.21.1.255 ,

vlan 1, up vlan 1, up vlan 1, up

Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON, pref 100, AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45.1.1.203, ras 300, hold 180, alive 60, adv 60 retry 120, orig 15, ttl 1, enabled metric none, default none, rip disabled, ospf disabled fixed disabled, static disabled, vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings:

Continued

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

129

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----- ---------------45.1.1.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.1.1.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.1.1.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.21.1.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.1.1.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.1.1.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.1.1.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.1.1.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.1.1.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.1.1.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.1.1.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.1.1.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------- --------------205.1.1.100 255.255.255.255 172.21.1.254 255.255.255.255 205.1.1.201 255.255.255.255 45.1.1.201 255.255.255.255

MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------- ---- ----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1

Route table information: Status code: * - best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------- ------------- ------------ ------------- -* 45.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 45.1.1.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.1.1.201 255.255.255.255 45.1.1.201 local addr 2 * 45.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 45.255.255.255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 172.21.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.21.1.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.21.1.254 255.255.255.255 172.21.1.254 local addr 4 * 172.21.1.255 255.255.255.255 172.21.1.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued

130

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

* 205.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 205.1.1.201 direct fixed 3 * 205.1.1.100 255.255.255.255 205.1.1.100 direct vip * 205.1.1.201 255.255.255.255 205.1.1.201 local addr 3 * 205.1.1.255 255.255.255.255 205.1.1.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian * 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled. Status codes: * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------- --------------- ----- ----- ----- --------------*> 45.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 ? *> 172.21.1.0 0.0.0.0 0 ? *> 205.1.1.0 0.0.0.0 0 ?

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

131

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu
Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Nortel Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing, each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand, it can become overutilized. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. With this software feature, the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server, based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.:
[Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess - Session Table Information Menu gslb - Global SLB Information Menu real - Show real server information group - Show real server group information virt - Show virtual server information filt - Show filter information port - Show port information wlm - Show Workload Manager information idshash - Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind - Show real server selected by hash, phash, or minmisses metric cookie - Decode the HEX value to get VIP, RIP and Rport synatk - Show SYN attack detection information dump - Show all layer 4 information

Table 4-28 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 134. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 139. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number, real IP address, MAC address, VLAN, physical switch port, layer where health check is performed, and health check result.

132

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-28 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number, 1-1024> Real server group information virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number, IP address, virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port, server port mapping, real server group, group backup server. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number, destination port, real server port, real server group, health check layer, group backup server, URL for health checks, and real server group, IP address, backup server, and status. port <port number> Displays the physical port number, proxy IP address, filter status, a list of applied filters, and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. wlm <work_load_manager_number, 1 to 16> Show workload manager information. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash, phash, or minmisses metric. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address, real server IP address, and real server port. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack, the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time, for example, every two seconds. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. For details, see page 140.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

133

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/slb/sess
Session Table Information
[Session Table Information Menu] cip - Show all session entries with source IP address cip6 - Show all session entries with source IP6 address cport - Show all session entries with source port dip - Show all session entries with destination IP address dip6 - Show all session entries with source IP6 address dport - Show all session entries with destination port pip - Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport - Show all session entries with proxy port filter - Show all session entries with matching filter flag - Show all session entries with matching flag port - Show all session entries with ingress port real - Show all session entries with real IP address sp - Show all session entries on sp dump - Show all session entries help - Session entry description

Table 4-29 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess)
Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address. cip6 <IP6_address> Display session entries with the specified IP6 address. cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port. dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address. dip6 <IP6_address> Display session entries with the specified IP6 address. dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port. pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address. pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.

134

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-29 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess)
Command Syntax and Usage filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|Vd|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag. See “Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System” on page 137 for a description of these options. port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor. dump <v4 | v6> Displays all session entries. Specify v4 to dump IPv4 information, v6 to dump IPv6 information or no parameter to display all information. Information similar to the following may appear in

a session entry dump:

3, 01: 1.1.1.1 4586, 2.2.2.1 http -> 1.1.1.2 3567 3.3.3.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

(13)

Note: The fields, 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example, are described in “Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch Operating System” on page 137. help Displays the description of the session entry.

Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications
L4 HTTP 3,01: 172.21.12.19 1040, 39.2.2.1 http -> 47.81.24.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2,16: 172.21.8.200 44687, 172.21.8.51 http -> 192.168.1.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3,01: 172.21.12.19 1040, 39.2.2.1 http -> 47.81.24.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

135

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

3,01: 172.21.12.19 4586, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 21220 -> 47.81.144.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection. 3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation, the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP 3,01: 172.21.12.19 4586, 39.2.2.1 rtsp -> 47.81.144.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3,01: 172.21.12.19 6970, 39.2.2.1 21220 -> 47.81.144.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2,07: 10.0.1.26 1706, 205.178.14.84 http -> 192.168.4.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1,00: 172.31.4.215 80, 172.31.4.200 0 172.31.3.11 age 8 EP c:1 1,09: 172.31.4.215 4098, 172.31.4.200 ftp ->172.31.3.20 ftp age 10 EU 1,09: 172.31.4.215 4102, 172.31.4.200 ftp-data ->172.31.3.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2,05: 172.21.8.16 2559, 10.0.1.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3,00: 237.162.52.123 160.10.20.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port, real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.

136

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Session dump information in Nortel Application Switch
Field (1) SP number (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address Description

This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet in IPv4 or IPv6. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to, for load balancing. If the switch does not find a live server, this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5). This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow, Deny or NAT. It will show “ALLOW”, “DENY” or “NAT” instead.

(7) Proxy Port (8) Real Server IP Address

This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch.
For load balancing, this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to. If the switch does not find live server, this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5). For example: 3,01: 1.1.1.1 1040, 2.2.2.1 http -> 3.3.3.1 http age 10 3,01: 1.1.1.1 6970, 2.2.2.1 rtsp -> 2.2.2.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering, this field also shows the real server IP address. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow, Deny or NAT. It will show ALLOW, DENY or NAT instead. For example: 3,01: 1.1.1.1 1040, 2.2.2.1 http -> 3.3.3.1 http age 10 f:11 2,07: 1.1.1.1 1706, 2.2.2.1 http-> 192.168.4.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

137

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Field (9) Server port

Description

This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. For RTSP UDP session, this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. It is for internal use only. This field can be urlwcr, wcr, idslb, linkslb or nonat.

(10) Age

This is the session timeout value. If no packet is received within the value specified, the session is freed. For example, if: age 10 - The session is aged out in 10 minutes.
age < 160 - The session is aged out in 160 minutes. This indicates that slowage is used. The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage.

(11) Filter number (12) Flag

This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session. “N”: Indicates no NAT, which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server.
“P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. Fields (6), (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID, or Cookie Pbind. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. “Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session. “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session. “Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. “Vd”: Indicates the session is a SIP NAT data session. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server.

(13) Persistent session user count

This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session.

Operating System
138 Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/slb/gslb
Global SLB Information Menu
An Nortel Application Switch Operating System running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection. The menu for this feature displays the following information:
[Global SLB Information Menu] virt - Show Global SLB site - Show Global SLB rule - Show Global SLB geo - Show Global SLB pers - Show Global SLB dump - Show all Global

virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information DNS persistence cache information SLB information

Table 4-30 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server, the number of the local and remote virtual servers, the number of virtual services on those virtual servers, and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers. site Displays the Global SLB remote site information. geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information. pers <IP_Address> Display the Global SLB DNS persistence cache information. dump Displays all Global SLB information.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

139

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/slb/dump
Show All Layer 4 Information
Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.1.2.200, 00:01:02:c1:4b:48, vlan 1, port 1, health 3, up 210.1.2.1, 00:01:02:70:4d:4a, vlan 1, port 8, health 3, up 20.20.20.102, 00:03:47:07:a4:9e, vlan 1, port 6, health 3, up 20.20.20.101, 00:01:02:71:9c:a6, vlan 1, port 7, health 3, up

Virtual server state: 1: 20.20.20.200, 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http, group 88, backup none, dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.20.20.102, backup none, 2 ms, up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20.20.20.101, backup none, 1 ms, up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http, rport 3128, vlan any 200: group 1, health 3, backup none proxy enabled, radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210.1.2.200, backup none, 3 ms, up 2: 210.1.2.1, backup none, 2 ms, up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled, filters: 80 idslb filt enabled, filters: 200 idslb filt enabled, filters: 200 filt disabled, filters: 50 200

140

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information
Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic, such as e-commerce transactions, receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command:
[Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser - BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont - Show Bandwidth Management Contract information

Table 4-31 Bandwidth Management Information
Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses. See page 142 for sample output.

cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

141

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/ipuser
BWM IP User Information Menu
[BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip - Show all IP user entries with IP address cont - Show all IP user entries for a contract sp - Show all IP user entries on sp dump - Show all IP user entries

Table 4-32 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser)
Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address. cont <BW Contract number, 1-1024> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor. The same fields as described in cont above are displayed, but only for the specified sp number. dump Displays all the IP user entries.

142

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The format of the output of the above commands:
SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -- -------- ---------------- --- ---------- ---------- ----2 11 11.0.1.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.0.1.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.0.1.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.0.1.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11.0.1.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.0.1.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.0.1.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry. Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry. Age: the age of the entry in seconds. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

143

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/cont
BWM Contract Information
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.81.138.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k

Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D

This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. Table 4-33 BWM Contract Information
Field Contract Policy Description

Displays the BWM contract number. Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Includes the following:
The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy

144

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-33 BWM Contract Information
Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit, if applied to the contract. Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced, this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).

State Traffic Shaping

Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

145

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/security Security Information
[Security Information Menu] port - Show port security information ipacl - Show IP ACL information udpblast - Show UDP blast protection information dos - Show protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention information dump - Show all security information

The information provided by each menu option is described in Table 4-34. Table 4-34 Security Information Menu (/info/security)
Command Syntax and Usage port This menu displays the current port security settings. ipacl This menu displays the current IP ACL settings. udpblast This menu displays UDP blast protection settings. dos This menu displays DoS protection settings. dump This menu displays all security settings.

146

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/link Link Status Information
Alias -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down

Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Nortel Application
Switch slot, including:

Port Alias Port number Port speed (10, 100, 10/100, or 1000) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

147

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Link status (up or down)

148

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/info/port Port Information
Alias -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --y n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 5 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 6 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 NAME -------------VLAN(s) -------------1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Port information includes: Port alias Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

149

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port

/info/swkey Software Enabled Keys
For optional Layer 4 switching software, the information would be displayed as follows:
Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management

Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For information on ordering optional software license keys, see “How to Get Help” on page 24.

/info/dump Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

150

Chapter 4: The Information Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 5

The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.

/stats Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu] sys - System Stats Menu port - Port Stats Menu pmirr - Port Mirroring Stats Menu l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Stats Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Stats Menu security - Security Stats Menu mp - MP-specific Stats Menu sp - SP-specific Stats Menu dump - Dump all stats

151
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage sys System statistics menu port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 154. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 170. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 174. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 199. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 232. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu options, see page 248. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options, see page 253. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 239. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 255. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. See page 255 for sample output.

152

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 256.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

153

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/sys System statistics menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a system basis.
[System Statistics Menu] access - System Access Menu mgmt - Show management port stats ntp - Show NTP server stats snmp - Show SNMP stats dump - Dump system stats

Table 5-2 System Statistics Menu Options (/stats/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage access Go to the System Access menu. mgmt Management port interface statistics. ntp Show NTP server statistics. snmp Show SNMP statistics. dump Dump system statistics.

154

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu] brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if - Show interface ("if") stats ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link - Show link stats rmon - Show RMON stats dump - Dump port stats clear - Clear all port stats

Table 5-3 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 156 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 157 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 161 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 162 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 163 for a sample output and the description of statistics. rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 164 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

155

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-3 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

/stats/port <port number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0

Table 5-4 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1PortOutFrames

dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards

156

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-4 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

/stats/port <port number>/ether
Ethernet Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port
Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]:

0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

157

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.

dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames

dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames

158

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics dot3StatsSQETestErrors Description A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std.802.31998 Edition, section 7.2.4.6. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.

dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions

dot3StatsLateCollisions

dot3StatsExcessive Collisions

dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

159

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-5 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors Description The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt, even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. For example, a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.

dot3StatsFrameTooLongs

dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors

dot3CollFrequencies

160

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number>/if
Interface Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0

ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0

Table 5-6 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface, including the MAC header and FCS. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors, dot3StatsFCSErrors, dot3StatsFrameTooLongs, dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface, including the MAC header and FCS. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface.

ifHCInUcastPkts

ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards

ifHCInErrors

ifHCOutOctets

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

161

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-6 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics ifHCOutUcastPkts Description The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors, dot3StatsLateCollisions, dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions, dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors.

ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts

ifHCOutDiscards

ifHCOutErrors

/stats/port <port number>/ip
Interface Protocol Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks:

0 0 0 0 0 0

ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards:

0 0

Table 5-7 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip)
Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.

162

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-7 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip)
Statistics ipInAddrErrors Description The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route option processing was successful. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address.

ipForwDatagrams

ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards

ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks

/stats/port <port number>/link
Link Statistics
This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.
Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange:

4

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

163

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-8 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link)
Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes.

/stats/port <port number>/rmon
RMON Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port.
RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets:

0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8

Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped; it is just the number of times this condition has been detected.

164

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics etherStatsOctets Description The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). If greater precision is desired, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets, respectively, and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9.6 + 6.4 ) + ( Octets × 0.8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10, 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. etherStatsPkts etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

165

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics etherStatsFragments Description The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.3 section 8.2.1.5 (10Base-5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10Base-2). These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. Section 8.2.1.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.3.1.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802.3 states that a station must detect a collision, in the receive mode, if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T. 14.2.1.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time). A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater, should report the same number of collisions. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).

etherStatsJabbers

etherStatsCollisions

etherStatsPkts64Octets

166

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-9 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon)
Statistics etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets Description The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

167

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number>/dump
Port Dump Statistics
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------

168

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets:

0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

169

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/pmirr Port mirroring statistics menu
This menu displays port mirroring statistics on an all ports basis.
[Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump - Show port mirroring stats clear - Clear all port mirroring stats

Table 5-10 PMIRR Statistics Menu Options (/stats/pmirr)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all mirrored port statistics. clear Clears the port statistics.

/stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu
[Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb - Show FDB stats lacp - Show LACP stats stg - Show STG stats dump - Dump layer 2 stats

Table 5-11 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics. To view statistics and their description, see page 171. lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics. To view statistics and their description, see page 172. stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics. To view statistics and their description, see page 173.

170

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-11 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Dump the Layer 2 statistics.

/stats/l2/fdb
FDB Statistics
FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0

This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database, including the number of new entries, finds, and unsuccessful searches. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-12 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb)
Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat lookup fails find fails overflows Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

171

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-12 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb)
Statistic max Description Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch.

/stats/l2/lacp
LACP Statistics
>> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted

-

9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0

Table 5-13 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp)
Field Description

Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port. The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port. The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port.

Marker Rsp PDUs trans- The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. mitted

172

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l2/stg
Spanning Tree Group Statistics
Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----- ------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-14 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg)
Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Xmt Cfg Description Displays the port number. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

173

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-14 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg)
Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted

/stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu
[Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf - OSPF Statistics Menu ip - Show IP stats ip6 - Show IP6 stats route - Show route stats arp - Show ARP stats vrrp - Show VRRP stats dns - Show DNS stats icmp - Show ICMP stats if - Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp - Show TCP stats udp - Show UDP stats ifclear - Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear - Clear IP stats dump - Dump layer 3 stats

Table 5-15 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu. See page 176 for sample output. ip Displays IP statistics. See page 181 for sample output. ip6 Displays IP6 statistics.See page 184 for sample output. route Displays route statistics. See page 189 for sample output. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 190 for sample output.

174

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-15 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 191 for sample output. dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. See page 192 for sample output. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. See page 193 for sample output. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. See page 195 for sample output. tcp Displays TCP statistics. See page 197 for sample output. udp Displays UDP statistics. See page 199 for sample output. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics. ipclear Clears IP statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

175

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/ospf
OSPF Statistics Menu
[OSPF stats Menu] general - Show global stats aindex - Show area(s) stats if - Show interface(s) stats

Table 5-16 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. See page 177 for sample output and details. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics.

176

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/ospf/general
OSPF Global Statistics
The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export

Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9

Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change

2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1

4 2 0 0 2 0 5

514 1028 0 0 0 0 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

177

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general)
Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description

178

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello Start The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated, and sequence numbers have been exchanged, across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets, across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors, in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. Description

n2way adjoint ok

negotiation done

exchange done

bad requests

bad sequence

loading done n1way rst_ad

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

179

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-17 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Statistics down Intf Change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. Description The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export

The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.

180

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/ip
IP Statistics
IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255

Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so forth. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets, which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route option processing was successful. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

ipInAddrErrors

ipForwDatagrams

ipInUnknownProtos

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

181

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams, which meet this no-route criterion. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). The number of IP datagrams successfully re- assembled. The number of failures detected by the IP re- assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so forth). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be, for example, because their Don't Fragment flag was set. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).

ipInDelivers ipOutRequests

ipOutDiscards

ipOutNoRoutes

ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails

ipFragOKs ipFragFails

ipFragCreates

182

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-18 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries, which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch), whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. The maximum number of seconds, which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).

ipDefaultTTL

ipReasmTimeout

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

183

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/ip6
IP6 Statistics Menu
>> Layer 3 Statistics# /stat/l3/ip6 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP6 statistics: InReceives: 20519 InDiscards: 2 InDelivers: 24793 ForwDatagrams: 0 UnknownProtos: 0 InAddrErrors: 0 OutRequests: 34548 OutNoRoutes: 0 ReasmOKs: 0 ReasmFails: 0 IcmpInMsgs: 24793 IcmpInErrors: 4268 IcmpOutMsgs: 12829 IcmpOutErrors: 4271 InEchos: 0 OutEchos: 8538 InEchoReplies: 8536 OutEchoReplies: 0 InDestUnreachs: 4268 OutDestUnreachs: 4271 InPktTooBigs: 0 OutPktTooBigs: 0 InTimeExcds: 0 OutTimeExcds: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------ICMP6 statistics: Interface: 1 InMsgs: 18929 InErrors: 0 InEchos: 0 InEchoReplies: 4268 InNeighborSolicits: 4513 InNeighborAdvertisements:4271 InRouterSolicits: 0 InRouterAdvertisements: 5877 InDestUnreachs: 0 InTimeExcds: 0 InPktTooBigs: 0 InParmProblems: 0 InRedirects: 0 OutMsgs: 4280 OutErrors: 0 OutEchos: 4269 OutEchoReplies: 0 OutNeighborSolicits: 3 OutNeighborAdvertisements:4516 OutRouterSolicits: 0 OutRouterAdvertisements: 1 OutRedirects: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface: 7 InMsgs: 5864 InErrors: 4268 InEchos: 0 InEchoReplies: 4268 InNeighborSolicits: 122 InNeighborAdvertisements: 3 InRouterSolicits: 0 InRouterAdvertisements: 1471 InDestUnreachs: 4268 InTimeExcds: 0 InPktTooBigs: 0 InParmProblems: 0 InRedirects: 0 OutMsgs: 8549 OutErrors: 4271 OutEchos: 4269 OutEchoReplies: 0 OutNeighborSolicits: 2 OutNeighborAdvertisements:124 OutRouterSolicits: 0 OutRouterAdvertisements: 1 OutRedirects: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP6 gateway health check statistics: gateway 5 echo-req 4269 echo-resp gateway 7 echo-req 4269 echo-resp 4268 fails 0 fails 0 4268

184

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6)
Statistics IP6 Statistics Section InReceives InDelivers The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including those received in error. The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 userprotocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the datagrams. The total number of IPv6 datagrams which local IPv6 user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams. The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. Note that this counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments. The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. The number of output datagrams which this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations. In entities which do not act as IPv6 routers, this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route processing was successful. Note that for a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., ::0) and unsupported addresses (e.g., addresses with unallocated prefixes). For entities which are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. Description

UnknownProtos

OutRequests

ReasmOKs

InDiscards

ForwDatagrams

InAddrErrors

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

185

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued)
Statistics OutNoRoutes ReasmFails Description The number of locally generated IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. The number of failures detected by the IPv6 re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments. The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors. Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages. The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.). The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.

IcmpInMsgs

IcmpOutMsgs

IcmpInErrors

IcmpOutErrors

IcmpInEchos ICMP6 Statistics Section InMsgs

The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors. Note that this interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the messages. The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.

InNeighborSolicits

186

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued)
Statistics InRouterSolicits InDestUnreachs InPktTooBigs InRedirects InErrors Description The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface. The number of Redirect messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP messages which the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.). The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface. The total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to send. The number of ICMP Echo Request messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Router Solicitation messages sent by the interface. The number of Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

InEchoReplies InNeighborAdvertisements InRouterAdvertisements InTimeExcds InParmProblems OutMsgs OutEchos OutNeighborSolicits OutRouterSolicits OutRedirects

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

187

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-19 IPv6 Statistics (/stats/l3/ip6) (Continued)
Statistics OutErrors Description The number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface. The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface.

OutEchoReplies OutNeighborAdvertisements OutRouterAdvertistments

188

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/route
Route Statistics
Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --- ------------- ------------------- ------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored:

0

ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut:

0 0

0 0 0 0 0

bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered:

0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-20 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)
Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent. The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. The maximum number of supported routes. Description

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

189

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-20 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)
Statistics ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored bgpRoutesFiltered The total number of BGP packets received. The total number of BGP packets sent. The total number of BGP packets dropped. The total number of failed sessions. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of current BGP routes. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. Description The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out.

/stats/l3/arp
ARP statistics
This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics.
MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --- --------------- --------------------- --------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192

190

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-21 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp)
Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.

/stats/l3/vrrp
VRRP Statistics
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed:
VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword:

0 0 0 0 0

vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval:

0 0 0 0

Table 5-22 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)
Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

191

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-22 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)
Statistics vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description

/stats/l3/dns
DNS Statistics
This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.
DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0

Table 5-23 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns)
Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.

192

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/icmp
ICMP Statistics
ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0

Table 5-24 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so forth). The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

icmpInErrors

icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

193

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-24 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.

icmpOutErrors

icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps

194

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/if <interface number>
Interface Statistics
IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1

Table 5-25 Interface Statistics (/stats/if)
Statistics ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts Description The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer), which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer), which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing, this counter will always be 0.

ifInNUCastPkts

ifInDiscards

ifInErrors

ifInUnknownProtos

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

195

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-25 Interface Statistics (/stats/if)
Statistics ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts. The number of outbound packets, which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down.

ifOutNUcastPkts

ifOutDiscards

ifOutErrors

ifStateChanges

196

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/tcp
TCP Statistics
TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0

Table 5-26 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this object should contain the value -1. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.

tcpRtoMax

tcpMaxConn

tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

197

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-26 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP checksums). The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections. The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests. The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.

tcpEstabResets

tcpInSegs

tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails

198

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/l3/udp
UDP Statistics
UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077

Table 5-27 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp)
Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors udpNoPorts Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.

/stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu
[Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp - SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb - Global SLB Stats Menu real - Show real server stats group - Show real server group stats virt - Show virtual server stats filt - Show filter stats layer7 - Show Layer 7 stats ssl - Show SSL SLB stats ftp - Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp - Show RTSP SLB stats dns - Show DNS SLB stats wap - Show WAP SLB stats maint - Show maintenance stats sip - Show SIP SLB stats wlm - Show Workload Manager SASP stats mirror - Show Session mirroring stats clear - Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux - Show auxiliary session table stats dump - Dump all SLB statistics

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

199

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-28 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 202. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. For more information, see page 206. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 211 for sample output. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see page 211. See page 212 for sample output. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see page 211. See page 213 for sample output. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. See page 213 for sample output. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. See page 214 for sample output. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. See page 219 for sample output. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. See page 220 for sample output. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. See page 223 for sample output.

200

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-28 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. See page 224 for sample output. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. See page 225 for sample output. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. See page 227 for sample output. sip Displays SIP SLB statistics. See page 229 for sample output. wlm <Workload Manager number, 1-16> <clear> Display Workload Manager SASP statistics. See page 230 for sample output. mirror Display session mirroring statistics. See page 231 for sample output. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Nortel Application Switch, resetting them to zero. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). All related SNMP counters. To view the statistics reset by this command, refer to Table 5-51 on page 230. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. To save dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

201

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/sp
Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu
[Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real - Show real server stats group - Show real server group stats virt - Show virtual server stats filt - Show filter stats maint - Show maintenance stats aux - Show auxiliary session table stats clear - Clear SP stats

Table 5-29 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp)
Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. See page 202 for a sample output. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. See page 203 for a sample output. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server. See page 203 for a sample output. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter. See page 203 for a sample output. maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics. See page 204 for a sample output. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. clear Deletes all the SP statistics.

/stats/slb/sp/real <real server number>
SP Real Server Statistics
Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24

202

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number>
SP Real Group Server Statistics
Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14 20 60 9 2 200.100.10.15 20 77 12 ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------40 137 21

Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000

/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number>
SP Virtual Server Statistics
Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14 20 60 9 2 200.100.10.15 20 77 12 ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------200.100.10.100 40 137 21

Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000

/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number>
SP Filter Statistics
SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

203

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint
SP Maintenance Statistics
SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-30 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint)
Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Terminated Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds). Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.

Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs

204

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-30 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint)
Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client, but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. They matched an active filter with the deny action set. 2. There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters.) 3. When there are no available session entries. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had an invalid reset flag set.

No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames

LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops

Total IP fragment ses- This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources.

IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

205

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/gslb
Global SLB Statistics Menu
[Global SLB Statistics Menu] real - Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt - Show Global SLB virtual server stats site - Show Global SLB remote site stats network - Show Global SLB network preference stats rule - Show Global SLB rule stats geo - Show Global SLB geographical preference stats pers - Show Global SLB DNS persistence cache stats maint - Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear - Clear all Global SLB stats dump - Show all Global SLB stats

Table 5-31 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch, under which the remote server is configured. To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen, see page 211. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen, see page 207. site <remote site, 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site. To view an example, see page 208. network <network, 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network. rule <rule, 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule. pers Displays Global SLB DNS persistence cache statistics. geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference. maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics, see page 209. clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics.

206

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-31 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all Global SLB statistics.

/stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number>
Real Server Global SLB Statistics
Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12

For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing, the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server

/stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number>
Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics
Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www.gslb.example.com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects ------ --------------- ---- ----------- -------------v1 200.200.200.1 0 0 r2 200.200.200.10 5 0 0 ------ --------------- ---- ----------- -------------Totals 0 0

Table 5-32 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt)
Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties), the number represents the real server ID on this switch, under which the remote server is configured.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

207

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-32 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt)
Field IP Address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects Description

IP address of the server. The remote site number.
The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server. The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server.

/stats/slb/gslb/site
Global SLB Site Statistics
Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348

Table 5-33 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site)
Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2.

208

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/gslb/maint
Global SLB Maintenance Statistics
Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0.0.0

Table 5-34 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint)
Field Bad remote site packets received Description

The number of bad packets received from the remote site. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches. If bad updates or dropped packets occur, check your syslog for configuration error messages. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites.

DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

209

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-34 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint)
Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description

The number of DNS queries received. The number of bad DNS queries received. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses.

HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received. Bad HTTP requests received

The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name. The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name, domain name, or the network domain configured. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name, domain name, or the network domain configured. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received.

HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain

Last no result domain

Last source IP

210

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/real <real server number>
Real Server SLB Statistics
Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000

NOTE – Octets are provided per server, not per service, unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211. Table 5-35 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real)
Statistics Current sessions Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server.

Per Service Octet Counters
For each load-balanced real server, the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis, you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. For instance, you can configure IP address 10.1.1.20 for HTTP services, and 10.1.1.21 for FTP services on the same physical server.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

211

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

2.

On the Nortel Application Switch, configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above. Continuing the example above, two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service). If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP), 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server, and five for the FTP services on each physical server.

3.

On the Nortel Application Switch, configure one real server group for each type of service, and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service. Thus, in keeping with our example, two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP.

4.

Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.

/stats/slb/group <real server group number>
Real Server Group Statistics
Real server group 1 stats: Total weight updates from WorkLoad Manager : 10 Current Total Highest IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions --------------- -------- ---------- -------200.100.10.14 20 60 9 200.100.10.15 20 77 12 --------------- -------- ---------- -------40 137 21

Real ---1 2 ----

Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000

Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211.

212

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/virt <virtual server number>
Virtual Server SLB Statistics
Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------1 200.100.10.14 20 60 9 2 200.100.10.15 20 77 12 ---- --------------- -------- ---------- -------200.100.10.20 40 309 21

Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000

NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line, below the real server IP addresses. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. Real server transmit/receive octets. For per-service octet counters, see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 211.

/stats/slb/filt <filter number>
Filter SLB Statistics
Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011

You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

213

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/layer7
SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu
[Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir - Show URL Redirection stats str - Show SLB String stats maint - Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats pooling - Show connection pooling stats

Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7)
Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. See page 214 for a sample output. str Displays SLB string statistics. See page 215 for a sample output. maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. See page 216 for a sample output. pooling Display the connection pooling statistics.See page 216 for a sample output.

/stats/slb/layer7/redir
Layer7 Redirection Statistics
Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-37 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir)
Statistics Description

Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server.

214

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-37 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir)
Statistics Description

Total straight to ori- The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server. Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.

/stats/slb/layer7/str
Layer 7 SLB String Statistics
SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www.[abcdefghijklm]*.com 3 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.com 4 www.junk.com 5 www.abc.com 6 www.[abcdefjhijklm]*.org 7 www.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-38 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str)
Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

215

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/layer7/maint
Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics
Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails - Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails - Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0

1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint)
Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding, the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1 client requests.0

Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1

216

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint)
Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order. The currently available SP memory units. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The number of outstanding data buffers used. The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of sequence buffer allocated.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The total number of sequence buffer is freed.

Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

217

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-39 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint)
Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails - Seq buffers Alloc Fails - Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request.2 The total of number buffers freed. The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain.

Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session.

/stats/slb/layer7/pooling
Layer7 Pooling Statistics
>> Layer 7 Statistics# pooling -----------------------------------------------------------------Connection pooling statistics: Current opened server connections: 0 Active server connections: 0 Available server connections: 0 Total number of aged out client connections: 0 Total number of aged out server connections: 0

218

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/ssl
SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics
SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0

Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------- -------- ---------- -------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0

Table 5-40 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl)
Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments The table shows the Current Sessions, the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId, these should all bind to the same server. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports. Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table.

SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

219

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/ftp
File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu
[FTP SLB parsing and active - Show parsing - Show maint - Show dump - Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats

Table 5-41 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp)
Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. See page 221 for sample output. parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 221 for sample output. maint Shows maintenance statistics. See page 222 for sample output. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. See page 222.

220

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/ftp/active
Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics
Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0

Table 5-42 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active)
Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment.

/stats/slb/ftp/parsing
Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics
Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0

Table 5-43 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing)
Statistics Total FTP Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

221

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/ftp/maint
FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics
FTP mode switch error: 0

Table 5-44 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint)
Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa.

/stats/slb/ftp/dump
FTP SLB Statistics Dump
Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-45 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump)
Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred.

Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa.

222

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/rtsp
RTSP SLB Statistics
Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- -------0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-46 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp)
Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection. The total number of UDP connections for data channels. The number depends upon the type of media player being used. The total number of times the connection got redirected. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down. The total number of buffer allocations used. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

223

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/dns
DNS SLB Statistics
Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-47 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns)
Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests. The total number of malformed DNS queries received. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query.

224

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/wap
WAP SLB Statistics
This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters.
WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails- SP dead: 0 req fails- SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails- SP dead: 0 req fails- DMA: 0

Table 5-48 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap)
Statistics Description

WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports The number of session bindings currently in use. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.

no available real server

requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

225

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-48 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap)
Statistics Description

TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails- SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP.

RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails- SP dead req fails- DMA The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.

226

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/maint
SLB Maintenance Statistics
SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Current IPF buffer sessions: Highest IPF buffer sessions: IPF buffer alloc fails: IPF SP buffer alloc fails: SP buffer too low: Exceeded 16 OOO packets: Free Service pool entries: Current IP6 sessions: Incorrect IP6 VIPs: Incorrect IP6 Vports: IP6 packets drops: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 0 0 0 0

SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table. Table 5-49 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint)
Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).

Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

227

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-49 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint)
Statistic Description

Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Incorrect Vports Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client, but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports.

No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks

No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had an invalid reset flag set. This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. This counter indicates the number of free service pool entries.

228

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/sip
SIP SLB Statistics
SIP Stats: Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number of of of of of of SIP Client Parse Errors SIP Server Parse Errors SIP Unknown Method packets SIP Incomplete Messages SIP Filter Parse Errors packets with SIP SDP NAT : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 5-50 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip)
Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.

Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch. Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of SIP Filter Parse Errors Total number of packets with SIP SDP NAT Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet. Total number of errors encountered during filter processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet. Total number of packets received that have SIP SDP NAT information.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

229

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/wlm <wlm number>
Display Workload Manager SASP statistics
Table 5-51 SLB WorkLoad Manager SASP (/stats/slb/wlm)
>> Server Load Balancing Statistics# /st/sl/wlm 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------Workload Manager 1 Statistics: Registration Requests: 1 Registration Replies: 1 Registration Reply Errors: 0 Deregisteration Requests: Deregisteration Replies: Deregisteration Reply Errors: Set LB State Requests: Set LB State Replies: Set LB State Reply Errors: Set Member State Requests: Set Member State Replies: Set Member State Reply Errors: Send Weights Messages received: Send Weights Message Parse Errors: Total Messages with Invalid LB Name: Total Messages with Invalid Group Name: Total Messages with Invalid Real Server Name: Messages with Invalid SASP Header: Messages with parse errors: Messages with Unsuppored Message Type: 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

/stats/slb/wlm <wlm number>/clear
Clear Workload Manager SASP Statistics
This command clears statistics for the specified Workload Manager.

230

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/slb/mirror
Display Workload Manager SASP statistics
Table 5-52 SLB Session Mirroring statistics (/stats/slb/mirror)
>> Server Load Balancing Statistics# mirror -----------------------------------------------------------------Session Mirroring Stats: Rx Tx Total Create Session Messages 0 0 Total Update Session Messages 0 0 Total Delete Session Messages 0 0 Total Create Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Update Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Delete Data Session Messages 0 0 Total Sessions Created 0 Total Sessions Updated 0 Total Sessions Deleted 0 Total Data Sessions Created 0 Total Data Sessions Updated 0 Total Data Sessions Deleted 0 Session table full 0 Unvailable pport 0 Session already present 0 Session not found 0 Control session not found 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

231

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu
[Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port - Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont - BW Contract stats rcont - BW Contract rate stats hist - BW History stats maint - Show BWM maint statistics ipusers - Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump - Dump all BWM statistics clear - Clear BWM statistics

Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 233. cont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. See page 234 for details. rcont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. See page 235 for details. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics. See page 237 for sample output. maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics. See page 238 for sample output. ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts. Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 319. See page 238 for sample output. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics. clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics.

232

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/bwm/port <port number>
BWM Switch Processor Statistics
[Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont - BW Contract stats rcont - BW Contract rate stats

Table 5-54 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp)
Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. See page 233 for a sample output. rcont <BW Contract number (1-1024)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.

/stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont
BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu
>> Bandwidth Management Port Statistics# cont -----------------------------------------------------------------BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed BufMax -------- ------------------- ---------- ---------- ------- ---1024 Default 0 0 0 0 16320

/stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont
BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics
This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen, the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. For example:
>> AAS_2424 - Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 - Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300, zero for infinite

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

233

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ------- ----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 1024 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 1024 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320

/stats/bwm/cont <contract number>
BWM Contract Statistics
BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed BufMax -------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ------- ------1024 Default 0 0 0 0 16320

The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. Table 5-55 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont)
Statistics Contract Name Octets Discards Total Pkts BufUsed Description The contract number. The contract name. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits. The total number of packets classified for that contract. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted.

234

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-55 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont)
Statistics BufMax Description Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.

/stats/bwm/rcont
BWM Contract Rate Statistics
Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts. NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen, the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. For example:
>> AAS_2424 - Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 - Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300, zero for infinite

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

235

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ------- ----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 1024 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960

Table 5-56 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont)
Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax Description The contract number. The contract name. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.

236

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/bwm/hist
BWM History Statistics
Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------- ---- ---------------- ---------- ---------- ---------47.80.23.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23.124 1024 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets

You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals. Table 5-57 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist)
Statistics Contract Octets Discards TimeStamp Description The contract number for which history is enabled. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded.

NOTE – These statistics can only be viewed when the e-mail option is enabled.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

237

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/bwm/maint
BWM Maintenance Statistics
BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0

/stats/bwm/ipusers
BWM IP Users Statistics
This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.
BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------0 20 0 0 20

238

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security Security Statistics
[Security Statistics Menu] ipacl - IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast - UDP Blast Statistics Menu dos - DoS Attack Statistics Menu pgroup - Show pattern match group statistics ratelim - Show rate limiting statistics dump - Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 240. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics, see page 244. udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics, see page 245. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics, see page 246. ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 246. dump Displays all security statistics.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

239

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/dos
DOS Attack Statistics Menu
[Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Statistics Menu] port - Show port protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats dump - Dump all protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats clear - Clear all protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention stats help - Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description

Table 5-58 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks, on the selected port only. dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch, for each of the following types of DOS attacks: iplen, ipversion, broadcast, loopback, land, ipreserved, ipttl, ipprot, ipoptlen, fragmoredont, fragdata, fragboundary, fraglast, fragdontoff, fragopt, fragoff, fragoversize, tcplen, tcpportzero, blat, tcpreserved, nullscan, fullxmasscan, finscan, vecnascan, xmasscan, synfinscan, flagabnormal, syndata, synfrag, ftpport, dnsport, seqzero, ackzero, tcpoptlen, udplen, udpportzero, fraggle, pepsi, rc8, snmpnull, icmplen, smurf, icmpdata, icmpoff, icmptype, igmplen, igmpfrag, igmptype, arplen, arpnbcast, arpnucast, arpspoof, garp, ip6len, ip6version For a description of these different types of DOS attacks, see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 241. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works.

240

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Types of DOS Attacks
Nortel Application Switch Operating System can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf, LandAttack, Fraggle, Nullscan, Xmascan, PortZero, and ScanSynFin. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

241

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks.
>> /stats/security/dos help iplen : IPv4 packets with bad IP header or payload length. ipversion : IPv4 packets with IP version not 4. broadcast : IPv4 packets with broadcast source or destination IP [0.0.0.0,255.255.255.255]. loopback : IPv4 packets with loopback source or destination IP [127.0.0.0/8]. land : IPv4 packets with same source and destination IP. ipreserved : IPv4 packets with IP reserved bit is set. ipttl : IPv4 packets with small IP TTL. ipprot : IPv4 packets with IP protocol is unassigned or reserved. ipoptlen : IPv4 packets with bad IP options length. fragmoredont: IPv4 packets with more fragments and don't fragment bits are set. fragdata : IPv4 packets with more fragments bit is set and small payload. fragboundary: IPv4 packets with more fragments bit is set and payload not at 8-byte boundary. fraglast : IPv4 packets last fragment without payload. fragdontoff : IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and don't fragment bits are set. fragopt : IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and IP options. fragoff : IPv4 packets with small non-zero fragment offset. fragoversize: IPv4 packets with non-zero fragment offset and oversize payload. tcplen : TCP packets with bad TCP header length. tcpportzero : TCP packets with source or destination port is zero. blat : TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. tcpreserved : TCP packets with TCP reserved bit is set. nullscan : TCP packets with all control bits are zero. fullxmasscan: TCP packets with all control bits are set. finscan : TCP packets with only FIN bit is set. vecnascan : TCP packets with only URG or PUSH or URG|FIN or PSH|FIN or URG|PSH bits are set.

242

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

xmasscan : TCP packets with FIN, URG and PSH bits are set. synfinscan : TCP packets with SYN and FIN bits are set. flagabnormal: TCP packets with abnormal control bits combination. syndata : TCP packets with SYN bit is set and with payload. synfrag : TCP packets with SYN bit is set and more fragments bit is set. ftpport : TCP packets with SPORT=20, DPORT<1024 and SYN bit is set. dnsport : TCP packets with SPORT=53, DPORT<1024 and SYN bit is set. seqzero : TCP packets with sequence number is zero. ackzero : TCP packets with acknowledgement number is zero and ACK bit is set. tcpoptlen : TCP packets with bad TCP options length. udplen : UDP packets with bad UDP header length. udpportzero : UDP packets with source or destination port is zero. fraggle : UDP packets to broadcast destination IP (x.x.x.255). pepsi : UDP packets with SPORT=19, DPORT=7 or SPORT=7, DPORT=19. rc8 : UDP packets with SPORT=7 and DPORT=7. snmpnull : UDP packets with DPORT=161 and without payload. icmplen : ICMP packets with bad ICMP header length. smurf : ICMP ping requests to a broadcast destination IP (x.x.x.255). icmpdata : ICMP packets with zero fragment offset and large payload. icmpoff : ICMP packets with large fragment offset. icmptype : ICMP packets with type is unassigned or reserved. igmplen : IGMP packets with bad IGMP header length. igmpfrag : IGMP packets with more fragments bit is set or non-zero fragment offset. igmptype : IGMP packets with type is unassigned or reserved. arplen : ARP request or reply packets with bad length. arpnbcast : ARP request packets with non broadcast destination MAC. arpnucast : ARP reply packets with non unicast destination MAC. arpspoof : ARP request or reply packets with mismatch source with sender MACs or destination with target MACs. garp : ARP request or reply packets with same source and destination IP. ip6len : IPv6 packets with bad header length. ip6version : IPv6 packets with IP version not 6.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

243

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/ipacl
IP Access Control List Statistics
The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command:
[IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump - IP address access control Stats clear - Clear all access control Stats

Table 5-59 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each source or destination IP address and mask pair in the access control list. >> Main# /stats/security/ipacl/dump ----------------------------------------------------------------IP ACL stats: Source IP Addr Mask Type Blocked Packets --------------- --------------- ----- --------------No source IP ACL's created Dest IP Addr Mask Type Blocked Packets --------------- --------------- ----- --------------No destination IP ACL's created clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets.

244

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/udpblast
UDP Blast Statistics
[UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump - UDP Blast Stats clear - Clear all UDP Blast Stats

Table 5-60 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast)
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port, and the current packet rate per second. See page 245 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets.

/stats/security/udpblast/dump
UDP Blast Dump Statistics
UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second --------------------------

Table 5-61 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump)
Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks. The number of blocked packets. Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

245

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/pgroup
UDP Pattern Match Statistics
Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0

This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 404.

/stats/security/ratelim
Rate Limiting Statistics
Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries:

0 0

0 0

0 0

Table 5-62 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim)
Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting.

246

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/security/dump
Dump Statistics for Security
IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries:

0 0

0 0

0 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

247

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp Management Processor Statistics
[MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt - Show Packet and TCP stats tcb - Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb - Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd - Show All Socket FD in use cpu - Show CPU utilization mem - Show memory stats

Table 5-63 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)
Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 249. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 251. ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 251. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 252. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 252. mem Displays memory statistics.

248

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/pkt
MP Packet Statistics
Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0

Table 5-64 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics Packet counts: allocs frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Description

jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

249

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-64 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded.

TCP counts: allocs current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available.

250

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/tcb
TCP Statistics
All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0 117f81a8: 47.81.27.6 1331 <=> 47.80.16.59 80 23 listen established

Table 5-65 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb)
Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0.0.0.0/47.81.27.6 0/1331 0.0.0.0/47.80.16.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State

/stats/mp/ucb
UCB Statistics
All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen

Table 5-66 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb)
Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

251

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/mp/sfd
MP-Specific SFD Statistics
All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0.0.0.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.0.0.0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0.0.0.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0.0.0.0 server 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 0 <=> 47.133.88.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP

/stats/mp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.
CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds:

100% 100% 100%

Table 5-67 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.

252

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics
[SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint - Show maintenance stats clear - Clear maintenance stats cpu - Show CPU utilization

Table 5-68 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp)
Statistics maint clear cpu Description Displays internal statistics, Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics, and MP DOS shield statistics. See page 254 for a sample output. Deletes all the maintenance statistics. Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see page 254.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

253

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/sp <SP number>/maint
SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics
Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards:

0 0 0 0

/stats/sp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP).
CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds:

6% 6% 6%

Table 5-69 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.

254

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-69 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.

/stats/pmirr Port Mirroring Statistics Menu
[Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump - Port Mirroring Stats clear - Clear all Port Mirroring Stats

Table 5-70 Port Mirroring
Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number, and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports. clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics.

CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently.

/stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics
Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

255

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-71 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt)
Statistics RX bytes RX packets RX errors RX dropped RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of bad packets received. The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. The number of multicast packets received. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. Not applicable. The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time.

/stats/dump Dump Statistics
Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more, depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
256 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 6

The Configuration Menu
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making, viewing, and saving switch configuration changes. Many of the commands, although not new, display more or different information than in the previous version. Important difference are called out in the text. To make finding information easier, the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.

/cfg Configuration Menu
[Configuration Menu] sys - System-wide Parameter Menu port - Port Menu pmirr - Port Mirroring Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Menu l2 - Layer 2 Menu l3 - Layer 3 Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security - Security Menu sslproc - SSL Processor Setup Menu setup - Step by step configuration set up dump - Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg - Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg - Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server

257
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)
Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 261. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 301. pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 315. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 316. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 325. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 342. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see Chapter 7, “The SLB Configuration Menu”. security Displays the Security Menu. To view menu options, see page 397. sslproc Displays the SSL processor setup Menu. To view menu options, see page 403 setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. For details, see page 403. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details, see page 407. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. For details, see page 408. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. For details, see page 408.

258

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes
As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters, the changes you make do not take effect immediately. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. Also, any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. While configuration changes are in the pending state, you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory

Viewing Pending Changes
You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI.

Applying Pending Changes
To make your configuration changes active, you must apply them. To apply configuration changes, enter apply at any prompt in the CLI.
# apply

NOTE – The apply command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface.

NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied, except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. To turn STP on or off, you must apply the changes, save them (see below), and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 517).

Saving the Configuration
In addition to applying the configuration changes, you can save them to flash memory on the Nortel Application Switch.
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

259

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. To save the new configuration, enter the following command at any CLI prompt:
# save

When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block, enter the following instead:
# save n

You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 515.

260

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys System Configuration
[System Menu] syslog mmgmt radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time timezone idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set system timezone (daylight savings) Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters

This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords, Web-based management settings, and management access list. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. To view menu options, see page 263. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 264. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 268. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 270. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. To view menu options, see page 271.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

261

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. To view menu options, see page 273. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 273. health Displays system health check menu. To view menu options, see page 287. access Displays System Access Menu. To view menu options, see page 288. date Prompts the user for the system date. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. timezone Configures the system time zone. To view an example, see page 300. idle <idle timeout in minutes; affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions, from 1 to 10080 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. bannr <string, maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator logs into the switch, the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host, which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. If you enable BOOTP, the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current system parameters.

262

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/syslog
System Host Log Configuration
NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 supports the RFC 3164 standard for Syslogs.
[Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur

-

Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings

Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog)
Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means log all the seven severity levels. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity, see page 264. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means, log all the seven severity levels. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity, see page 264. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 0. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 0. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When necessary, disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. It is enabled by default.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

263

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog)
Command Syntax and Usage log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans, gslb, filter), or enable/disable syslog on all available features. cur Displays the current syslog settings.

Seven Levels of Severity
Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. This means that the system is unusable. 1: Alert. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. 2: Critical. This means the condition of the system is critical. 3: Error. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. 4: Warning. This means that the system is giving a warning. 5: Notice. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. 6: Informational. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. 7. Debug. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages.

/cfg/sys/mmgmt
Management Port Configuration Menu
The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. While the switch can be managed from any network port, the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI, SNMP, or HTTP. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, and default gateway, and must be enabled before it can be used. If this port is disabled, the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management

264

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

using the console). If this port is enabled, the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port, or in some cases, by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP.
[Management Port Menu] port - Management Port Phy Menu addr - Set IP address mask - Set subnet mask gw - Set default gateway address intr - Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns - Set default port for DNS ntp - Set default port for NTP radius - Set default port for RADIUS tacacs - Set default port for TACACS+ smtp - Set default port for SMTP snmp - Set default port for SNMP traps syslog - Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp - Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp - Set default port for FTP/TFTP wlm - Set default port for Workload Manager report - Set default port for Reporting server ena - Enable management port dis - Disable management port cur - Display current configuration

Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu. To view the menu options, see page 268. addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address. mask <subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)> Sets the subnet mask. gw <gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway. intr <interval (0 - 60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

265

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port. Default is data port. ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports. The default is data port. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. Default is data port. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports. Default is data port. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. Default is data port. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. Default is data port. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. Default is data port. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. But if it is set to data, then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. Default is data port. wlm ["mgmt"|"data"] Set the default port for the workload manager. report ["mgmt"|"data"] Set the default port for the reporting server. ena Enables the Management port.

266

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the Management port. cur Displays the current configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

267

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/mmgmt/port
Management Port Link Menu
[Management Port Link Menu] speed - Set link speed mode - Set full or half duplex mode auto - Set autonegotiation cur - Display current link configuration

Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port)
Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port. Default is any. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode. Default is any. auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. By default this command is turned on. cur Displays the current link configuration.

/cfg/sys/radius
RADIUS Server Configuration
[RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv - Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv - Set secondary RADIUS server address secret - Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 - Set secondary RADIUS server secret port - Set RADIUS port retries - Set RADIUS server retries timeout - Set RADIUS server timeout telnet - Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on - Turn RADIUS authentication ON off - Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur - Display current RADIUS configuration

268

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-6 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. secret <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s). secret2 <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s). port <RADIUS port to configure, default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1500 - 3000. The default is 1645. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. The default is 3 requests. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 3 seconds. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. on Enables the RADIUS server. off Disables the RADIUS server. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

269

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/tacacs
TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492.) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also, RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile, whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Nortel Application Switch Operating System to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature. Apart from that, TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests. Supports decoupled authentication, authorization, and accounting.

[TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur -

Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration

270

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-7 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. secret <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s). secret2 <1-128 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). port <RADIUS port configure, default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1500 - 3000. The default is 1645. retries <RADIUS server retries, 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. The default is 3 requests. timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds, 4 to 15> Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 3 seconds. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. on Enables the TACACS+ server. off Disables the TACACS+ server. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.

/cfg/sys/ntp
NTP Server Configuration

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

271

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. By default, this option is disabled.
[NTP Server Menu] prisrv - Set primary NTP server address secsrv - Set secondary NTP server address intrval - Set NTP server resync interval tzone - Set NTP timezone offset from GMT on - Turn NTP service ON off - Turn NTP service OFF cur - Display current NTP configuration

Table 6-8 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640). The default value is 1440 minutes. tzone <offset from GMT, in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset, in hours and minutes, of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). on Enables the NTP synchronization service. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. cur Displays the current NTP service settings.

272

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/sonmp
SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration
[SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration

SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Nortel Application Switches on the network. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB. The topology algorithm is executed by each Nortel Application Switch on which SONMP is enabled. Table 6-9 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp)
Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. If the interface specified by this command is not up, then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. on This command enables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. off This command disables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration.

/cfg/sys/ssnmp
System SNMP Configuration
Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports SNMP-based network management. In SNMP model of network management, a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

273

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify. SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings

[System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Menu name - Set SNMP "sysName" locn - Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont - Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm - Set SNMP read community string wcomm - Set SNMP write community string trsrc - Set SNMP trap source interface timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth - Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt - Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur - Display current system SNMP configuration

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. To view menu options, see page 276. name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters.

274

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is public. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface. This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number.

NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field.
timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes, 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. When you use diff and apply, memory is allocated to store the output of the command. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled. linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is enabled. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

275

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3
SNMPv3 Configuration Menu
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.
[SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur

-

usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration

Table 6-11 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view menu options, see page 278. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view menu options, see page 279. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights. The View-based Access Control Model

defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view menu options, see page 280.

276

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-11 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3)
group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]>

A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. To view menu options, see page 282.
comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. To view menu options, see page 283. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information, consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. This is also termed as transport endpoint. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests, and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view menu options, see page 284. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters, consisting of message processing model, security model, security level, and security name information. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters, or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. To view menu options, see page 285. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. To view menu options, see page 286. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. This command is enabled by default. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

277

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm
User Security Model Configuration Menu
You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.
[SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration

Table 6-12 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. The default algorithm is none. authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command, you need to provide a password, otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. If you specify des as the privacy protocol, then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). If you select none as the authentication protocol, you will get an error message. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password.

278

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-12 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries. cur Displays the USM user entries.

cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name - Set view name tree - Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask - Set view mask type - Set view type del - Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur - Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration

Table 6-13 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters. tree <object identifier, such as,. 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0, max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree, a string of maximum 32 characters, which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees. mask <bitmask, max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees, which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

279

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access
View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name - Set group name prefix - Set content prefix model - Set security model level - Set minimum level of security match - Set prefix only or exact match rview - Set read view index wview - Set write view index nview - Set notify view index del - Delete vacmAccess entry cur - Display current vacmAccess configuration

Table 6-14 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group. prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access. An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. For more information on naming the management information, see RFC2571, the SNMP Architecture document. The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.

280

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-14 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact, then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

281

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name gname - Set group gname del - Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur - Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration

Table 6-15 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group)
Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model. uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 278. gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 280. del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry. cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.

282

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index - Set community index name - Set community string uname - Set USM user name tag - Set community tag del - Delete communityTable entry cur - Display current communityTable configuration

Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm)
Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum. name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 278. uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. del Deletes the community table entry. cur Displays the community table configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

283

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu
This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name - Set target address name addr - Set target transport address IP port - Set target transport address port taglist - Set tag list pname - Set targetParams name del - Delete targetAddrTable entry cur - Display current targetAddrTable configuration

Table 6-17 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address name associated with this entry. addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. taglist <list of tag string, max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 285. del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.

284

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthnoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv).
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name - Set target params name mpmodel - Set message processing model model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name level - Set minimum level of security del - Delete targetParamsTable entry cur - Display current targetParamsTable configuration

Table 6-18 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. mpmodel snmpv3|snmpv1|snmpv2c Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 278) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

285

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-18 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry. cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu
SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name - Set notify name tag - Set notify tag del - Delete notifyTable entry cur - Display current notifyTable configuration

Table 6-19 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable, that matches the value of this tag, is selected. del Deletes the notify table entry. cur Displays the current notify table configuration.

286

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/health
System Health Check Configuration Menu
[System TCP Health Menu] add - Add TCP services to listen for health check rem - Remove TCP services from listening on - Turn system TCP health services ON off - Turn system TCP health services OFF cur - Display current TCP health services configuration

Table 6-20 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health)
Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. on Turns on the TCP health check services. off Turns off the TCP health check services. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

287

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access
System Access Control Configuration
[System Access Menu] mgmt - Management Network Access Menu port - Port Management Access Menu user - User Access Control Menu (passwords) https - HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu sshd - SSH Server Menu xml - XML Configuration Access Menu http - Enable/disable HTTP (Web) server access wport - Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp - Set SNMP access control tnport - Set Telnet server port number rlimit - Set max rate of ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets to MP cur - Display current system access configuration

Table 6-21 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 289. port Dispal the port management access menu.To view menu options, see page 291. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see page 291. https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. To view menu options, see page 295. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. It is disabled by default. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080). snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled, read-only, or read-write. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. This command is disabled by default. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port.

288

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-21 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port. rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate, 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP protocols. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. Then specify the maximum rate, which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. cur Displays the current configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/mgmt
Management Networks Menu
This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 supports up to 10 management networks. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Nortel Application Switch Operating System.
[Management Networks Menu] add - Add mgmt network definition rem - Remove mgmt network definition cur - Display current mgmt network definitions

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

289

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-22 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the Nortel Application Switch Operating System browser-based interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.

NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network.
rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. cur Displays the current configuration.

290

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access/port
Port Management Access Menu
[Port Management Access Menu] add - Add port with management access aadd - Add all ports with management access rem - Remove port from management access arem - Remove all ports from management access cur - Display current ports with management access

Table 6-23 Port Management Access Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <port_number> Add a port with management access. aadd Add all ports with management access. rem <port_number> Remove a port from management access. arem Remove all ports from management access. cur Displays the port numbers that currently have management access.

/cfg/sys/access/user
User Access Control Menu
uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

291

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID, 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu. To view menu options, see page 294. usrpw Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. Access includes “user” functions. l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. Access includes “slboper” functions. opw Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. Access includes “l4oper” functions. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics, but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. Access includes “l4oper” functions. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters. Access includes “slbadmin” functions.

292

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Nortel Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. cur Displays the current user status.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

293

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access/user/uid
System User ID Configuration Menu
This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number, the real server name, the operational state of the real server, and the number of current sessions. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers.
[User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] - Set class of service - Set user name - Set user password - Add real server - Remove real server - Enable user ID - Disable user ID - Delete user ID - Display current user configuration

Table 6-25 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid)
Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. Nortel Application Switch Operating System defines these levels as: User, SLB Operator, Layer 4 Operator, Operator, SLB Administrator, and Administrator, with User being the most restricted level. name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum. add <real server number, 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user. rem <real server number, 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user. ena Enables the user ID. dis Disables the user ID.

294

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-25 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID. cur Displays the current user ID configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/https
HTTPS Access Configuration Menu
[https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration

Table 6-26 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https)
Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example, city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example, company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example, section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example, user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example, email address) []: info@nortelnetworks.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will restart SSL agent.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

295

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-26 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https)
Command Syntax and Usage certSave Allows the client, or the Web browser, to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration.

296

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access/sshd
SSH Server Menu
[SSH Server Menu] sshport - Set SSH server port number ena - Enable SCP apply and save on - Turn SSH server ON (SSHv1/SSHv2) cur - Display current SSH server configuration

Table 6-27 SSH Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage sshport <TCP_port_number> Set the server port number. ena Sets the SCP apply and save. on Set the SSH server to on. cur Display the current SSH server configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

297

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access/xml
XML Configuration Access Menu
[XML Config Access Menu] xml - Enable/disable XML config access port - Set XML server port number gtcert - Import XML client certificate delcert - Delete XML client certificate dispcert - Display XML client certificate debug - Debug XML operations cur - Display current XML config access configuration

Table 6-28 XML Configuration Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage xml Enable or disable XML access. For an example, see page 299 port <TCP_port_number> Set the XML server port number. gtcert Import an XML client certificate. Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: delcert Delete XML client certificate. Current XML client certificate has been deleted from FLASH dispcert Display the current XML certificate. debug Toggle Debug mode on or off. Enabling XML debugging causes all commands in the XML file to be echoed to the Console and prefaces each one with running XML cmd: or Invalid XML cmd:. All responses to the commands will also be output to the Console. Current XML debug: enabled Enter new XML debug [d/e]: cur Display current XML configuration. XML config access currently disabled on TCP port 443 XML debug is enabled Note: there are pending config changes; use "diff" to see them.

298

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access/xml/xml
Example of enabling or disabling XML access
Current XML access: disabled Pending new XML access: enabled Enter new XML access [d/e]:

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

299

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/timezone
Configure the Timezone
>> Main# /cfg/sys/timezone Please identify a location so that time zone rules can be set correctly. Please select a continent or ocean. 1) Africa 2) Americas 3) Antarctica 4) Arctic Ocean 5) Asia 6) Atlantic Ocean 7) Australia 8) Europe 9) Indian Ocean 10) Pacific Ocean 11) None - disable timezone setting Enter the number of your choice: 2 Please select a country. 1) Anguilla 18) Ecuador 35) Paraguay 2) Antigua & Barbuda 19) El Salvador 36) Peru 3) Argentina 20) French Guiana 37) Puerto Rico 4) Aruba 21) Greenland 38) St Kitts & Nevis 5) Bahamas 22) Grenada 39) St Lucia 6) Barbados 23) Guadeloupe 40) St Pierre & Miquelon 7) Belize 24) Guatemala 41) St Vincent 8) Bolivia 25) Guyana 42) Suriname 9) Brazil 26) Haiti 43) Trinidad & Tobago 10) Canada 27) Honduras 44) Turks & Caicos Is 11) Cayman Islands 28) Jamaica 45) United States 12) Chile 29) Martinique 46) Uruguay 13) Colombia 30) Mexico 47) Venezuela 14) Costa Rica 31) Montserrat 48) Virgin Islands (UK) 15) Cuba 32) Netherlands Antilles 49) Virgin Islands (US) 16) Dominica 33) Nicaragua 17) Dominican Republic 34) Panama Enter the number of your choice: 10

300

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Please select one of the following time zone regions. 1) Newfoundland Island 2) Atlantic Time - Nova Scotia (most places), NB, W Labrador, E Quebec & PEI 3) Atlantic Time - E Labrador 4) Eastern Time - Ontario & Quebec - most locations 5) Eastern Time - Thunder Bay, Ontario 6) Eastern Standard Time - Pangnirtung, Nunavut 7) Eastern Standard Time - east Nunavut 8) Eastern Standard Time - central Nunavut 9) Central Time - Manitoba & west Ontario 10) Central Time - Rainy River & Fort Frances, Ontario 11) Central Time - west Nunavut 12) Central Standard Time - Saskatchewan - most locations 13) Central Standard Time - Saskatchewan - midwest 14) Mountain Time - Alberta, east British Columbia & west Saskatchewan 15) Mountain Time - central Northwest Territories 16) Mountain Time - west Northwest Territories 17) Mountain Standard Time - Dawson Creek & Fort Saint John, British Columbia 18) Pacific Time - west British Columbia 19) Pacific Time - south Yukon 20) Pacific Time - north Yukon Enter the number of your choice: 2

/cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration
The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. This command is enabled by default. Port configuration is different on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series and 3000
series.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

301

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 Series
The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series: Table 6-29 Port Configuration and Numbering on Nortel Application Switch Operating
System 2000 Series Model Nortel Application Switch 2208 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2216 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2224 (1U) Nortel Application Switch 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28

Fast Ethernet Ports
The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port. The ports are auto-sensing, auto-negotiating, and support half or full-duplex operation.

SFP GBIC Ports
The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. For more information on connectors, please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Nortel
Application Switch Operating System.

302

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The commands on Nortel Application Switch Operating System 2000 series and their description are as follows:
[Port <port_number> Menu] fast - Fast Phy Menu gig - Gig Phy Menu pvid - Set default port VLAN id alias - Set port alias name - Set port name cont - Set default port BW Contract nonip - Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw - Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon - Enable/Disable RMON for port tag - Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly - Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena - Enable port dis - Disable port cur - Display current port configuration

Table 6-30 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet, this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 313. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 313. pvid <VLAN number, 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1. alias <15 characters string> Set an alias for the port number. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to none. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. nonip <BW Contract number, 1-1024> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

303

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-30 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-100m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch. Using this command, you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch. This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth. For example, the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m. The default is 0.

NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command.
rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default. ena Enables the port. dis Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

/cfg/port <port number> fast|gig
Port Link Configuration
[Fast Link Menu] speed - Set link speed mode - Set full or half duplex mode fctl - Set flow control auto - Set auto negotiation cur - Display current fast link configuration

Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.

304

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – If the port does not have a Gig Ethernet physical link, the following message is displayed: >> Port 1# gig Current Port 1 does not have Gig Ethernet phy.

NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports, these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. Using these configuration menus, you can set port parameters such as speed, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link. Table 6-31 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig)
Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. cur Displays the current port parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

305

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Nortel Application Switch 3000 Series
The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Nortel Application Switch 3408: Table 6-32 Port configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408
Model Nortel Application Switch 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1, 2, 7, 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12

Port Configuration on Nortel Application Switch 3408
The Nortel Application Switch 3408 contains 12 ports. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1, 2, 7, and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. Four dual-mode ports (3, 4, 5, and 6). These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link, it is fixed at 1000 Mbps, full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link, it can be configured at any speed. However, if 1000 Mbps is selected, autonegotiation must be turned on. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 311 for more details. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12). These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only. NOTE – For more information on connectors, refer to the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E.

306

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Single-Mode ports
10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports
When you select a single-mode copper port (1, 2, 7, or 8), you see the menu below:
[Port 1 Menu] fast gig pvid alias name cont nonip egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur

-

Fast Phy Menu Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port alias Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allow IP related frames at ingress Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration

Table 6-33 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1, 2, 7, or 8>)
Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 308. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

307

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-33 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1, 2, 7, or 8>)
Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the port. dis Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

/cfg/port <port number> gig
Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu
[GE Copper Link Menu] speed - Set link speed mode - Set duplex mode fctl - Set flow control auto - Set auto negotiate cur - Display current ge copper link configuration

Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. Using these configuration menus, you can set port parameters such as speed, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link. Table 6-34 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1, 2, 7, or 8>/gig)
Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex

308

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-34 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1, 2, 7, or 8>/gig)
Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.

1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports
When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12), you see a slightly different menu as below:
[Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur

-

SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration

Table 6-35 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>)
Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 310. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

309

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-35 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>)
Command Syntax and Usage name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default. ena Enables the port. dis Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

/cfg/port <port number> gig
Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu
[GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] - Set flow control - Set auto negotiate - Display current SFP gig link configuration

Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. Using these configuration menus, you can set port parameters such as flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link.

310

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-36 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig)
Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters.

Dual-Mode Ports
When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6), you see the menu below:
[Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur

-

Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration

Table 6-37 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>)
Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 313. sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 314.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

311

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-37 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>)
Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. If you choose none, the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The default number is 1. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default. ena Enables the port. dis Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 314.) cur Displays the current port parameters.

312

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop
Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration
[GE Copper Link Menu] speed - Set link speed mode - Set duplex mode fctl - Set flow control auto - Set auto negotiate cur - Display current ge copper link configuration

Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. Link menu options are described in Table 6-38 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Nortel Application Switch. Using these configuration menus, you can set port parameters such as speed, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link. Table 6-38 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop)
Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

313

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp
Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu
[GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] - Set flow control - Display current SFP gig link configuration

Table 6-39 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp)
Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration.

Temporarily Disabling a Port
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the following command at any prompt:
Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis

Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use apply or save. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Nortel Application Switch is reset. See the “Operations Menu” on page 499 for other operations-level commands.

314

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu
[Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs

Port mirroring is disabled by default. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure, enable, and disable the monitored port. When enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. Table 6-40 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr)
Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port. To view menu options, see page 315. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.

/cfg/pmirr monport
Port-Mirroring Menu
>> Port Mirroring# monport Enter port (1-28): <port_number> -----------------------------------------------------------[Port 1 Menu] add - Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem - Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur - Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

315

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-41 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in, out, or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the mirrored port. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both, the frame is sent to the monitoring port. VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. If you do not specify a VLAN, all traffic on that port will be mirrored. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. For example: >> Port 1# cur Monitoring port (Mirrored port,direction,vlans) 1 none

/cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration
Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic, such as e-commerce transactions, receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key. In order to enable BWM, users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. By default, BWM is turned off. Refer to your Application Guide for more information.

316

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

[Bandwidth Management Menu] cont - Contract Menu policy - Policy Menu group - Group Menu user - Set SMTP server user name report - Set IP address of Reporting server entries - Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen - Set the frequency of BWM statistics in minutes email - Enable/disable sending BWM statistics via email force - Enable/disable enforce policies on - Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off - Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur - Display current Bandwidth Management configuration

NOTE – Up to 1024 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. Table 6-42 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm)
Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-1024)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu. To manage bandwidth on an Nortel

Application Switch, you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. For further details, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide.
By default, this option is disabled. To view menu options, see page 319.

policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita-

tions defined for any set of frames, specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization. For further details, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide.
To view menu options, see page 322.

group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 323. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed. The default is set to None. report <IP4 address> | <IP6 address> Set the IP address of the Reporting Server.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

317

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-42 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm)
Command Syntax and Usage entries <64k|128k|256k|512k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table. frequen <1-1440 minutes, 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes. The default is set to 0. email disable|enable Enable/disable sending BWM statistics using email. When this option is disabled, these statistics are sent using a socket mechanism. force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. When disabled, the reordering of the packets does not occur. The packets will exit in the order they came in. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. By default, this option is enabled. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch. off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.

318

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>
Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration
[BW Contract <1 to 1024> Menu] timepol - Time policy Menu name - Set Contract name policy - Set Contract Policy prec - Set Contract Precedence iptype - Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract pmirr - Set monitoring port for packet mirroring iplimit - Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract history - Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos - Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly - Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping - Enable/disable traffic shaping - disable is rate limiting wtcpwin - Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena - Enable BW Contract dis - Disable BW Contract del - Delete BW Contract cur - Display current BW Contract configuration

Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont)
Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu. To view menu options, see page 320. name <31 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract. >> BW Contract 1# name Current BW Contract name: Enter new BW Contract name: policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. The default policy number is 64. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. The default value is 1. iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract, whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP). pmirr <port | none> Defines a port to mirror contract packets to. Enter a valid port to enable this feature or none to disable it. This command is available in maintenance mode only.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

319

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont)
Command Syntax and Usage iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. If enabled, each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 322. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. By default, it is enabled. wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. By default, it is disabled. mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only. The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. In this context, shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract. By overwriting the default window size, the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size, the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. For details, refer to the Application Guide. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. del Removes this contract from the switch. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration.

/cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number>
BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu

320

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands:
[BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day - Set Time Policy day from - Set Time Policy from hour to - Set Time Policy to hour policy - Set Time Policy enable - Enable Time Policy disable - Disable Time Policy delete - Delete Time Policy cur - Display current Time Policy configuration

Table 6-44 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol)
Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week, weekdays (Monday to Friday), weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday. The default is everyday. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours. If am or pm is not specified, the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours. If am or pm is not specified, the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. policy <BW Policy number, 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract. enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch. disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch. delete Deletes the current Time Policy. cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch. For example: Time Policy 1: Day everyday, From Hour 12am, To Hour 12am, Policy 512, disabled

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

321

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/bwm/policy <policy number>
Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration
[Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration

Table 6-45 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol)
Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. The default value is 2000 kbps. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. The default value is 1000 kbps. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. The default value is 500Kbytes. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic. utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. With this option set to the default value of “0,” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. With this option set to the default value of “0,” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. The default value is 8192 bytes.

322

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-45 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration.

/cfg/bwm/group
Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu
[BW Group 1 Menu] add - Add Contract to this group rem - Remove Contract from this group del - Delete BW Group cur - Display current BW Group configuration

Table 6-46 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group)
Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number, 1-1023 excluding default> Adds a contract to this group. rem <BW Contract number, 1-1023 excluding default> Removes a contract from this group. del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group. cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

323

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/bwm/cur
Bandwidth Management Current Configuration
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 1024 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320

324

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu
[Layer 2 Menu] mrst stg trunk lacp vlan team ntmstg cur Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Port Teaming Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters

Table 6-47 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage mrst Go to the Multiple/Rapid Spanning Tree menu. See page 326. stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 329. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 333. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu. To view menu options, see page 335. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. To view menu options, see page 339. team Go to the port teaming menu. See page 341. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled, the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled, the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

325

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst
Multiple Spanning Tree Menu
[Multiple Spanning Tree Menu] cist - Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu name - Set MST region name version - Set Version of this MST region maxhop - Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 - 60) mode - Spanning Tree Mode on - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) ON off - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) OFF cur - Display current MST parameters

Table 6-48 Multiple Spanning Tree Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cist Go to the Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu. See page 327. name <1-32 character region name> Set the MST region name. version <version number 1-65535> Set the MST region version. maxhop <max hops 4-60> Set the maximum MST hop count. mode mstp|rstp Set the spanning tree mode. on Set the spanning tree on (Bridge MSTP/RSTP runs normally). off Set the spanning tree off (Bridge MSTP/RSTP does not run). cur Display the current MST parameters.

326

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist
Multiple Spanning Tree Menu
[Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu] brg - CIST Bridge parameter menu port - CIST Port parameter menu default - Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parms cur - Display current CIST parameters

Table 6-49 Mupltiple Spanning Tree CIST Bridge Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage brg Go to the CIST Bridge parameter menu. See page 328. port <port_number> Set the port number. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. cur Displays current values of all objects settable from this menu.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

327

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg
CIST Bridge Menu
[CIST Bridge Menu] prior - Set CIST bridge mxage - Set CIST bridge fwd - Set CIST bridge cur - Display current Priority (0-65535) Max Age (6-40 secs) Forward Delay (4-30 secs) CIST bridge parameters

Table 6-50 Mupltiple Spanning Tree CIST Bridge Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge Priority, 0-65535> Set the bridge priority. mxage <new bridge Max Age, 6-40 secs> Set the port number. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay, 4-30 secs> Set the CIST bridge forward delay. cur Displays current values of all objects settable from the CIST bridge menu.

/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg cur
Current configuration for CIST Bridge
>> CIST Bridge# cur -----------------------------------------------------------------Current Common Internal Spanning Tree settings: Bridge params: Priority MaxAge FwdDel 32768 20 15

Table 6-51 CIST bridge configuration
Statistics Priority MaxAge FwdDel Description The current CIST Bridge priority setting. Priority is a value between 0 and 65535. The current CIST Bridge maximum aging setting. MaxAge is a value in seconds between 6 and 40. The current CIST Bridge forwarding delay setting. FwdDel is a value in seconds between 4 and 30.

328

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration
When multiple paths exist on a network, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. When multiple paths exist, Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. If that path fails, Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. Thus, STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the IEEE 802.1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it. Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports. See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch. This command is turned on by default.
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg - Bridge parameter menu port - Port parameter menu add - Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear - Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on - Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off - Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur - Display current bridge parameters

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

329

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STP must be enabled. Table 6-52 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options, see page 331. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 332. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. remove <VLAN numbers, 1-4095 (802.1d & RSTP) / 2-4094 (MSTP)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.

330

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/stg/brg
Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior - Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello - Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage - Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd - Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging - Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable) cur - Display current bridge parameters

Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-53 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is 15 seconds.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

331

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-53 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds, and the default is 300 seconds. To disable aging, set this parameter to 0. cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.

When configuring STP bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage

/cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #>
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
[Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior - Set port Priority (0-255) cost - Set port Path Cost link - Set port link type (auto,p2p,or shared; default: auto) edge - Enable/disable edge port on - Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off - Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur - Display current port Spanning Tree parameters

Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port.

332

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-54 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The range is 0 to 255, and the default is 128. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports, and 1 for Gigabit ports. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. link auto|p2p|shared Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto) edge disable|enable Enable/disable edge port on Enables STP on the port. off Disables STP on the port. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.

/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Nortel Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single, larger virtual link. When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Nortel Application Switch, with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

333

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Trunking from non-Nortel devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. By default, the trunk group is empty and disabled.
[Trunk group 1 Menu] cont - Set BW contract for this trunk group add - Add port to trunk group rem - Remove port from trunk group ena - Enable trunk group dis - Disable trunk group del - Delete trunk group cur - Display current Trunk Group configuration

Table 6-55 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk)
Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group. By default, the contract number is 1024 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. ena Enables the current trunk group. dis Turns the current trunk group off. del Removes the current trunk group configuration. cur Displays the current trunk group parameters.

334

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu
Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 supports IEEE 802.3ad standard on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. At the core of the 802.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802.3ad standard (LACP). You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802.3ad standard called the LACP trunks. The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch. The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight. The 802.3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex, and treating them as if they were part of a single, logical link segment. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails, traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links. NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard. LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation. Each external port in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System can have one of the following LACP modes. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group. When the system initializes, all ports are in off mode by default. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

335

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port. Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin, an operational key, and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports. You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable. The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID. Please refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol. NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System.
[LACP Menu] sysprio - Set LACP system priority timeout - Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port - LACP port Menu cur - Display current LACP configuration

Table 6-56 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. Lower numbers provide higher priority. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey. The system priority, in conjunction with port priority, decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports. The default value is 32768. timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods. The default value is long.

336

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-56 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. To view menu options, see page 338. cur Displays the current LACP configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

337

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number>
LACP Port Configuration Menu
[LACP Port 1 Menu] mode - Set LACP mode prio - Set LACP port priority adminkey - Set LACP port admin key cur - Display current LACP port configuration

Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port. Table 6-57 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #)
Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option, you can turn LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. All ports are in off mode by default. active: Using this option, you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets. passive: Using this option, you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode. Passive ports do not initiate negotiation, but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default value is 128. adminkey <1-65535> Sets the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.

338

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration
VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains, to create logical segmentation of workgroups, and to enforce security policies among logical segments. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes, change the status of the VLAN, delete the VLAN, and change the port membership of the VLAN. For more information on configuring VLANs, see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 41. By default, the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1, which is enabled all the time.
[VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur

-

Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration

Table 6-58 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default VLAN name is the first one. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. cont <BW Contract number, (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. The default contract number is 1024 on AD3 and AD4. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

339

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-58 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. By default, it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. ena Enables this VLAN. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. del Deletes this VLAN. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration.

NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. Also, you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 307).

340

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l2/team <team number> Port Team Configuration
Port teams are used to operationally link ports and interfaces together.
[Port team 1 Menu] addport - Add port to team remport - Remove port from team addtrunk - Add trunk group to team remtrunk - Remove trunk group from team ena - Enable port team dis - Disable port team del - Delete port team cur - Display current port team configuration

Table 6-59 outlines the commands in this menu. Table 6-59 Port Team Configuration Menu
Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the specified port to the current team. remport <port number> Removes the specified port from the current team. addtrunk <trunk group number> Adds a trunk group to the current team. remtrunk <trunk group number> Removes a trunk group from the current team. ena Enables the port team. dis Disables the port team. del Deletes the port team. cur Displays the current port team configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

341

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu
[Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration

Table 6-60 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 344. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options, see page 346. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options, see page 348. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. To view menu options, see page 348. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options, see page 350. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options see page 352. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options see page 353. rip Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 357.

342

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-60 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options, see page 361. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 371. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 378. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. To view menu options, see page 379. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 380. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 381. rtrid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the router ID. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. The default gateway metric is strict. For more information on gateway metrics, see page 396. cur Displays the current IP configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

343

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/if <interface number>
IP Interface Configuration
[IP Interface ip6nd ipver addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] IP6 Neighbor Discovery Menu Set IP version Set IP address Set subnet mask/prefix len Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration

The Nortel Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the Nortel Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. The Interface option is disabled by default. Table 6-61 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)
Command Syntax and Usage ip6nd Opens the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery menu This menu is used to enable or disable the sending of IPv6 Router Advertisement packets from this interface. For more information on this topic, refer to page 345. ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version. addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101 for IPv4 or 3001::abcd:5678 for IPv6)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 and colon notation for IPv6. mask <IP subnet mask for IPv4 or prefix length for IPv6 (such as 255.255.255.0 for IPv4 or 64 for IPv6)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or prefix length for IPv6. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN, though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. It is enabled by default.

344

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-61 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)
Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this IP interface. dis Disables this IP interface. del Removes this IP interface. cur Displays the current interface settings.

/cfg/l3/if/ip6nd
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu
[IP6 Neighbor Discovery Menu] rtradv - Enable/disable router advertisement

This menu is used to configure the sending of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery router advertisements from this interface. Table 6-62 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage rtradv disable | enable Enables or disables the sending of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery router advertisements from this interface.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

345

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/gw <gateway number>
Default IP Gateway Configuration
[Default gateway 1 Menu] ipver - Set IP version addr - Set IP address intr - Set interval between ping attempts retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan - Set VLAN number prio - Set priority of default gateway route arp - Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena - Enable default gateway dis - Disable default gateway del - Delete default gateway cur - Display current default gateway configuration

NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing. Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways. This option is disabled by default. Table 6-63 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version. addr <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44 for IPv4 or 3001::abcd:1234 for IPv6)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation for IPv4 and colon notation for IPv6. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. The intr option sets the time between health checks. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. The default is 2 seconds. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The default is 8 attempts. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.

346

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-63 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low, relative to learned default routes. If you set the priority to high, then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF, BGP, or RIP protocols). If you set the priority to low, then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route.

NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route.
arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. This command is disabled by default. ena Enables the gateway for use. dis Disables the gateway. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. cur Displays the current gateway settings.

Default Gateway Metrics
For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled, see page 396.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

347

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/route
IP Static Route Configuration
[IP Static Route Menu] add - Add static route rem - Remove static route cur - Display current static routes

Up to 128 static routes can be configured. Table 6-64 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route)
Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> [interface number] Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address, destination subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. If a gateway address is 0.0.0.0., the route becomes a black hole route, where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. cur Displays the current IP static routes.

/cfg/l3/arp
ARP Configuration Menu
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP communication, the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.
[ARP Menu] static rearp cur

- Static ARP Menu - Set re-ARP period in minutes - Display current ARP configuration

348

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-65 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. To view options, see page 349. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. cur Displays the current ARP configurations.

/cfg/l3/arp/static
ARP Static Configuration Menu
Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. NOTE – Nortel Application Switch Operating System 21.0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots. Nortel Application Switch Operating System 20.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot.
[Static ARP Menu] add - Add a permanent ARP entry del - Delete an ARP entry cur - Display current static ARP configuration

Table 6-66 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static)
Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry. del <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry. cur Displays current static ARP configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

349

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/frwd
IP Forwarding Configuration Menu
[IP Forwarding Menu] local - Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr - Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on - Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off - Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur - Display current IP Forwarding configuration

Table 6-67 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd)
Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching. Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. To view menu options, see page 350. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. This command is disabled by default. on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Nortel Application Switch. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Nortel Application Switch. Forwarding is turned on by default. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.

/cfg/l3/frwd/local
Local Network Route Caching Definition
This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache, and to remove local networks.
[IP Local Networks Menu] add - Add local network definition rem - Remove local network definition cur - Display current local network definitions

350

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local)
Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network. For details, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 351. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network. cur Displays the current local network definitions.

Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache
The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently, by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Nortel Application Switch. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Nortel Application Switch. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached, and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache, the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address. By default, the local network address and mask are both set to 0.0.0.0. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Nortel Application Switch. To limit the route cache to your local hosts, you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table. Table 6-68 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges
Local Host Address Range 0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 205.32.0.0 - 205.32.255.255 Address 0.0.0.0 128.0.0.0 205.32.0.0 Mask 128.0.0.0 128.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway. The default gateways must be within range.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

351

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/nwf
Network Filter Configuration
[IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr - IP Address mask - IP Subnet mask enable - Enable Network Filter disable - Disable Network Filter delete - Delete Network Filter cur - Display current Network Filter configuration

Table 6-69 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter. The default address is 0.0.0.0. mask <IP4 subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)> | <IP6 mask prefix len (eg, 64)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default value is 0.0.0.0. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), assign the network filter to a route map, then assign the route map to the peer. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration. For example: Current Network Filter 1: addr 0.0.0.0, mask 0.0.0.0, disabled

352

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>
Route Map Configuration Menu
Route maps control and modify routing information. NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.
[IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration

Table 6-70 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap)
Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. For more information, see page 355. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. For more information, see page 356. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. One to three path preferences can be configured. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

353

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-70 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. none—Removes the OSPF metric. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the precedence. Default value is 10. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map. enable Enables the route map. disable Disables the route map. delete Deletes the route map. cur Displays the current route configuration.

354

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number>
IP Access List Configuration Menu
NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.
[IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration

Table 6-71 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)
Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 352 for details. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. enable Enables the access list. disable Disables the access list. delete Deletes the access list. cur Displays the current Access List configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

355

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path>
Autonomous System Filter Path
NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.
[AS Filter 1 Menu] as - AS number action - Set AS Filter action enable - Enable AS Filter disable - Disable AS Filter delete - Delete AS Filter cur - Display current AS Filter configuration

Table 6-72 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)
Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. disable Disables the Autonomous System filter. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.

356

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rip
Routing Information Protocol Configuration
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP). RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms. The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network. RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one. For RIP1, no mask information is exchanged; the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update. For RIP2, mask information is sent. There are two timers associated with each route: a timeout and garbage-collection timer. Upon expiration of the timeout timer, the route is no longer valid but it is retained in the routing table for a short time so that neighbors can be notified that the route has been dropped. Upon expiration of the garbage-collection timer, the route is finally removed from the routing table. The timeout timer is set for 180 seconds and the garbage-collection timer is set for 120 seconds by default. The menu below is used for configuring globally Routing Information Protocol parameters. The Routing Information Protocol is turned off by default.
[Routing Information Protocol Menu] if - RIP Interface Menu update - Set update period in seconds vip - Enable/disable vip advertisement statc - Enable/disable static routes advertisement on - Globally turn RIP ON off - Globally turn RIP OFF current - Display current RIP configuration

Table 6-73 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip)
Command Syntax and Usage if <Interface Number (1-256)> Go to the RIP Interface menu. See page 359. update <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. It is set at 30 seconds by default.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

357

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-73 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip)
Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. If a VIP route exists in a routing table, it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down, the route gets removed from the routing table, and will not be advertised. If we disable all the real servers using operation command, the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table, and the switch will continue to advertise the route. statc disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of static routes. on Globally turns RIP ON. off Globally turns RIP OFF. cur Displays the current RIP configuration.

358

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rip/if
RIP Interface Menu
[RIP Interface 1 Menu] version - Set RIP version supply - Enable/disable supplying route updates listen - Enable/disable listening to route updates poison - Enable/disable poisoned reverse trigg - Enable/disable triggered updates mcast - Enable/disable multicast updates default - Set default route action metric - Set metric auth - Set authentication type key - Set authentication key enable - Enable interface disable - Disable interface current - Display current RIP interface configuration

Table 6-74 RIP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage version 1|2|both Set the RIP version. The default value is 2. supply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates. When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. This is enabled by default. listen disable|enable When enabled, the switch stores routing information from other routers. The default is enabled. poison disable|enable When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. The default is disabled. When disabled, the switch uses split horizon only. mcast disable|enable Enable or disable triggered updates. The default is enabled. default none|listen|supply|both Set the default route action. The default action is none. metric <value [1-15]> Set metric value for this RIP interface. The default value is 1. auth none|password Set the type of authentication. The default value is none. key <key|none (to remove existing key value)> Set the authentication key. The default value is none.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

359

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-74 RIP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage enable Enable the interface. disable Disable the interface. current Displays current values of all objects settable from this menu.

360

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf
Open Shortest Path First Configuration
Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple areas, one area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone, which then distributes it to other areas as needed. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch, refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide.
[Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex - OSPF Area (index) Menu range - OSPF Summary Range Menu if - OSPF Interface Menu virt - OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key - OSPF MD5 Key Menu host - OSPF Host Entry Menu redist - OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb - Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default - Export default route information on - Globally turn OSPF ON off - Globally turn OSPF OFF cur - Display current OSPF configuration

Table 6-75 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. See page 363 to view menu options. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 364 to view menu options. if <interface number (1-255)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 365 to view menu options. virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 367 to view menu options.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

361

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-75 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. See page 369 to view menu options. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 370 to view menu options. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default. on Enables OSPF on the Nortel Application Switch. off Disables OSPF on the Nortel Application Switch. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.

362

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex
Area Index Configuration Menu
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid - Set area ID type - Set area type metric - Set stub area metric auth - Set authentication type spf - Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable - Enable area disable - Disable area delete - Delete area cur - Display current OSPF area configuration

Table 6-76 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

363

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-76 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. enable Enables the OSPF area. disable Disables the OSPF area. delete Deletes the OSPF area. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.

/cfg/l3/ospf/range
OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu
[OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] - Set IP address - Set IP mask - Set area index - Enable/disable hide range - Enable range - Disable range - Delete range - Display current OSPF summary range configuration

Table 6-77 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range. mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101> Displays the IP address mask for the range. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Nortel Application Switch.

364

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-77 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.

/cfg/l3/ospf/if
OSPF Interface Configuration Menu
[OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

365

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-78 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Nortel Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet, which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. enable Enables OSPF interface. disable Disables OSPF interface. delete Deletes OSPF interface. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.

366

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/virt
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu
[OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] - Set area index - Set hello interval in seconds - Set dead interval in seconds - Set transit delay in seconds - Set retransmit interval in seconds - Set router ID of virtual neighbor - Set authentication key - Set MD5 key ID - Enable interface - Disable interface - Delete interface - Display current OSPF interface configuration

Table 6-79 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet, which is set to be in an interval of seconds. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet, which is set to be in an interval of seconds. Default is 40 seconds. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds. Default is one seconds. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. Default is five seconds. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 0.0.0.0. key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

367

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-79 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link. disable Disables OSPF virtual link. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.

/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu
[OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration

Table 6-80 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key)
Command Syntax and Usage key <key, up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration.

368

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/host
OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu
[OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr - Set host entry IP address aindex - Set area index cost - Set cost of this host entry enable - Enable host entry disable - Disable host entry delete - Delete host entry cur - Display current OSPF host entry configuration

Table 6-81 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host. enable Enables OSPF host entry. disable Disables OSPF host entry. delete Deletes OSPF host entry. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

369

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp>
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.
[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add - Add rmap into route redistribution list rem - Remove rmap from route redistribution list export - Export all routes of this protocol cur - Display current route-maps added

Table 6-82 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.To add all the 32 route maps, enter all. To add specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at the end. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) ... |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To remove all 32 route maps, enter all. To remove specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at end. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol, enter none. cur Displays the current route map settings.

370

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bgp
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network, rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system, it is called internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems, it is called external BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. BGP is turned off by default.
[Border Gateway peer aggr as maxpath pref on off cur Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Max AS Path Length Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration

NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface. Table 6-83 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous system, exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. To view menu options, see page 373. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. To view menu options, see page 377.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

371

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-83 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy, either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university, a business enterprise, or a business division). An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). maxpath <max AS path length (1-127)> This command limits the maximum length of an accepted AS Path. The default value is 50. Paths greater than this value will be ignored. The command is designed to protect the MP CPU, memory resources and routing table from BGP-based attacks, BGP errors and probes designed to locate BGP speaking devices that do not limit the maximum AS Path. pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred.

When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local preference if you are using iBGP.
on Globally turns BGP on. off Globally turns BGP off. cur Displays the current BGP configuration.

372

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number>
BGP Peer Configuration Menu
[BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist - Redistribution menu addr - Set remote IP address ras - Set remote autonomous system number hold - Set hold time alive - Set keep alive time advert - Set min time between advertisements retry - Set connect retry interval orig - Set min time between route originations ttl - Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi - Add rmap into in-rmap list addo - Add rmap into out-rmap list remi - Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo - Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable - Enable peer disable - Disable peer delete - Delete peer cur - Display current peer configuration

This menu is used to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. The peer option is disabled by default. Table 6-84 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. To view the menu options, see page 375. addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0.0.0.0. ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. hold <hold time (0, 3-65535)> Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. It is set at 90 seconds by default. alive <keepalive time (0, 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. It is set at 0 by default.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

373

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-84 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that, when exhausted, would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. It is also used to support multi-hops, which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. The default number is set at 1. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. ena Enables this peer configuration. dis Disables this peer configuration. del Deletes this peer configuration. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration.

374

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist
BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu
[Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration

Table 6-85 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. Defaults routes can be configured as import, originate, redistribute, or none. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes. fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

375

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-85 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.

376

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number>
BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu
NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.
[BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr - Set aggregation IP address mask - Set aggregation network mask enable - Enable aggregation disable - Disable aggregation delete - Delete aggregation current - Display current aggregation configuration

This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers. Table 6-86 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address, such as 192.4.17.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate. mask <IP subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate. enable Enables the selected aggregate. disable Disables the selected aggregate. delete Deletes the selected aggregate. current Displays the current aggregate configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

377

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/port <port number>
IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu
[IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on - Turn Forwarding ON off - Turn Forwarding OFF cur - Display current port configuration

The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. By default, the port forwarding option is turned on. Table 6-87 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port)
Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.

378

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/dns
Domain Name System Configuration Menu
[Domain Name System Menu] prima - Set IP address of primary DNS server secon - Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname - Set default domain name cur - Display current DNS configuration

The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping, traceroute, and tftp commands. Table 6-88 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns)
Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted decimal notation. secon <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. For example: mycompany.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

379

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr - Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server on - Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off - Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur - Display current BOOTP relay configuration

The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Nortel Application Switch. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default. Table 6-89 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. addr2 <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.

380

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration Menu
[Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Nortel Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. By default, VRRP is disabled. Nortel Application Switch Operating System has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches.For more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in your Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. Table 6-90 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options, see page 383. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 387. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Nortel Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu options, see page 390.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

381

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-90 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-255)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 394. track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 395. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. By default, this option is disabled. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters.

382

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration Menu
[VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] - Priority Tracking Menu - Set virtual router ID - Set IP address - Set interface number - Set renter priority - Set advertisement interval - Enable or disable preemption - Enable or disable sharing - Enable virtual router - Disable virtual router - Delete virtual router - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. Virtual routers are disabled by default. Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. To view menu options, see page 385. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. The default value is 1. The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

383

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing, an Nortel proprietary extension to VRRP. When enabled, this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router, even when in backup mode. By default, this option is enabled. ena Enables this virtual router. dis Disables this virtual router. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.

384

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-91 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] - Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers - Enable/disable tracking HSRP - Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 395). Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-91 on page 383) is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts, reals, and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers,” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

385

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-92 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.

386

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup
Virtual Router Group Menu
This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch, you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. If failover occurs on a customer link, the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected. Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.
[VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track - Priority Tracking Menu name - Set virtual router group name add - Add virtual router to group rem - Remove virtual router from group prio - Set priority for virtual router group trackvr - Set track virtual router for group adver - Set advertisement interval for group preem - Enable/disable preemption for group share - Enable/disable sharing for group ena - Enable virtual router group dis - Disable virtual router group del - Delete virtual router group cur - Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration

Table 6-93 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 388. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

387

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-93 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. trackvr <virtual router number (0-1024)> Set track virtual router for group adver <1-255 seconds> Set advertisement interval for group. preem disable|enable Enable/disable preemption for group. share disable|enable Enable/disable sharing for group. ena Enables the virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu

388

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 395). Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled.
[VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration

Table 6-94 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track)
Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

389

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-94 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track)
Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/group
Virtual Router Group Configuration
[VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] - Priority Tracking Menu - Set virtual router ID - Set interface number - Set renter priority - Set advertisement interval - Enable or disable preemption - Enable or disable sharing - Enable virtual router - Disable virtual router - Delete virtual router - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router, which forces all virtual routers on the Nortel Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.

390

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Nortel Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration, where only one switch is active at any time. Table 6-95 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. Tracking is Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. To view menu options, see page 395. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). The default switch IP interface number is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. adver <1-255 (seconds)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default is 1. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing, Nortel’s proprietary extension to VRRP. When enabled, this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router, even when in backup mode. By default, this option is enabled.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

391

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-95 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration
[Virtual Router ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration

NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, then the tracking option will be available only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.

392

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-96 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track)
Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default. ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

393

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number>
VRRP Interface Configuration
NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured.
[VRRP Interface auth passw del cur 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration

This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. Table 6-97 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if)
Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication), or password (password authentication). passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP interface itself is not deleted. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.

394

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/track
VRRP Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs - Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs - Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports - Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts - Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals - Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp - Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv - Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur - Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration

This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 385), the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. Table 6-98 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. The default value is 2. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. The default value is 2. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. The default value is 2. l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing. The default value is 2. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router. The default value is 2. hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. The default value is 10.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

395

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-98 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)
Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. The default value is 10. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.

These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 385) are enabled.

/cfg/l3/metrc <metric name>
Default Gateway Metrics
If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled, a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. There are two metrics, which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 396. Table 6-99 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)
Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled, at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. This provides basic gateway load balancing. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy, enabled gateway in line. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway.

roundrobin

396

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb
/cfg/slb displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see Chapter 7, “The SLB Configuration Menu”.

/cfg/security Security Configuration Menu
[Security Menu] port ipacl udpblast dos pgroup seclog pdepth cur Port Security Menu IP ACL Menu UDP Blast Protection Menu Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration

Table 6-100 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. To view menu options, see page 399. ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. To view options, see page 400. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. To view menu options, see page 402. dos Go to the Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu. To view menu options, see page 403. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 404. seclog <rate threshold packets/sec, 0-1048576 (0, no rate threshold)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

397

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-100 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security)
Command Syntax and Usage pdepth <# of packets, 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream. The window is in units of packets. cur Displays the current security configuration.

398

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/security/port
Port Security Menu
[Port <port_number> Menu] bogon - Enable/disable bogon IP ACL ipacl - Enable/disable IP ACL udpblast - Enable/disable UDP blast protection dos - Enable/disable protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention add - Add protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention aadd - Add all protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention rem - Remove protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention arem - Remove all protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention help - Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description cur - Display current port configuration

Table 6-101 Port Security Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage bogon enable|disable Enable or disable bogon IP ACL. ipacl enable|disable Enable or disable IP ACL. udpblast enable|disable Enable or disable UDP blast protection. dos enable|disable Enable or disable protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention. add iplen | ipversion | broadcast | loopback | land | ipreerved |ipttl | ipprot | ipoptlen | fragmoredont | fragdata | fragboundary | fraglast | fragdontoff | fragopt | fragoff | frag oversize | tcplen | tcportzero | blat | tcpreserved | nullscan | fullxmasscan | finscan | vecnascan | xmasscan | synfinscan | flagabnormal | syndata | synfrag | ftpport | dnsport | seqzero |ackzero | tcpoptlen | udplen | udpportzero | fraggle | pepsi | rc8 | snmpnull | icmplen | smurf | icmpdata | icmpoff | icmptype | igmplen | igmpfrag | igmptype | arplen | arpnbcast | arpncast | arpspoof | garp | ip6len | ip6version Add protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention. aadd Add all protocol anomaly/DoS attack to prevention for the port.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

399

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-101 Port Security Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage rem iplen | ipversion | broadcast | loopback | land | ipreerved |ipttl | ipprot | ipoptlen | fragmoredont | fragdata | fragboundary | fraglast | fragdontoff | fragopt | fragoff | frag oversize | tcplen | tcportzero | blat | tcpreserved | nullscan | fullxmasscan | finscan | vecnascan | xmasscan | synfinscan | flagabnormal | syndata | synfrag | ftpport | dnsport | seqzero |ackzero | tcpoptlen | udplen | udpportzero | fraggle | pepsi | rc8 | snmpnull | icmplen | smurf | icmpdata | icmpoff | icmptype | igmplen | igmpfrag | igmptype | arplen | arpnbcast | arpncast | arpspoof | garp | ip6len | ip6version Remove protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention. arem Remove all protocol anomaly/DoS attack from prevention for the port. help Description of Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention. cur Display current port configuration. For example: Current port 1: bogon disabled, ipacl disabled, udpblast disabled, dos disabled

/cfg/security/ipacl
IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu
Nortel Application Switch Operating System can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. When traffic ingresses the switch, the client source or destination IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. If a match is found, then the client traffic is blocked.
[IP ACL Menu] add rem arem dadd drem darem cfg bogon oper cur

-

Add configuration source IP Address/Mask Remove configuration source IP Address/Mask Remove all configuration source IP Address/Mask Add configuration destination IP Address/Mask Remove configuration destination IP Address/Mask Remove all configuration destination IP Address/Mask Display configuration IP Address/Mask Display bogon IP Address/Mask Display operations IP Address/Mask Display all IP Address/Mask

400

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-102 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl)
Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied, defined by the IP address/mask pair. rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied, defined by the IP address/mask pair index. arem Remove all configuration source IP Address/Mask. dadd <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Add configuration destination IP Address/Mask. drem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove configuration destination IP Address/Mask. darem Remove all configuration destination IP Address/Mask. cfg Display configuration IP Address/Mask. bogon Display bogon IP Address/Mask. oper Display operations IP Address/Mask. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

401

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/security/udpblast
UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu
Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. Nortel Application Switch Operating System can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port, thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. When the maximum number of packets/second is reached, UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. Nortel Application Switch Operating System supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers, using any integer from 1 to 65535. The maximum port range is 5000. If the first port number is 300, the last number that can be used is 5300. While you can configure multiple port ranges, the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports.
[UDP Blast Protection Menu] add - Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem - Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default - Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur - Display all UDP blast protection Ports

Table 6-103 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast)
Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection, as well as the maximum packet rate per second. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second, UDP traffic will be dropped. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports.

402

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/security/dos
Anomaly and Denial of Service Attack Prevention Menu
[Protocol Anomaly and DoS Attack Prevention Menu] ipttl - Set the smallest allowable IP ttl for ipttl ipprot - Set the highest allowable IP protocol for ipprot fragdata - Set smallest allowable IP fragment payload for fragdata fragoff - Set the smallest allowable IP fragment offset for fragoff syndata - Set the largest allowable TCP SYN payload for syndata icmpdata - Set the largest allowable ICMP payload for icmpdata icmpoff - Set the largest allowable ICMP fragment offset for icmpoff help - Protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention description cur - Display current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention

Table 6-104 Anomaly and DoS Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ipttl <IPv4 TTL, 0-255> Set the smallest allowable IP ttl for IPTTL. ipprot <highest allowable IPv4 protocol [0-255]> Set the highest allowable IP protocol for IP protection. For example: Current highest allowable IPv4 protocol: 137 Enter new highest allowable IPv4 protocol [0-255]: fragdata <IPv4 fragment payload size in bytes, 16-248> Set the smallest allowable IP fragment payload. fragoff <IPv4 fragment offset in multiples of 8 bytes, 1-255> Set the smallest allowable IP fragment offset. syndata <TCP packet payload size in bytes, 0-255> Set the largest allowable IP SYN payload. icmpdata <ICMP packet payload size in bytes, 1-9026> Set the largest allowable ICMP payload. icmpoff <ICMP fragment offset in multiples of 8 bytes, 1-8190> Set the largest allowable ICMP fragment offset. help Description of the Anomaly and DoS attack prevention. cur Display current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention settings. For example: Current protocol anomaly and DoS attack prevention settings: ipttl 1, ipprot 137, fragdata 32, fragoff 4, syndata 0, icmpdata 800, icmpoff 101

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

403

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number>
Pattern Matching Menu
When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings, it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter, the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings, group them into a pattern group, name the pattern group, and then apply the group to a filter. The filtering commands in Nortel Application Switch Operating System Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter, the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0 supports up to 1024 pattern matching groups.
[Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name - Set pattern group name add - Add SLB string to group rem - Remove SLB string from group del - Delete pattern group cur - Display current configuration

Table 6-105 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. To configure SLB strings, use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 475. To view existing strings and their ID numbers, use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command, also on page 475. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group. del Deletes the pattern group.

404

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 6-105 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

405

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/sslproc
SSL Processor Menu
[SSL Processor Menu] mip - Set SSL processor management IP port - Set SSL processor Web server port rts - Enable/disable RTS processing filt - Enable/disable filtering add - Add filter rem - Remove filter cur - Display current SSL processor configuration

Table 6-106 SSL Processor Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage mip <SSL processor management IP> Set SSL processor management IP. port <SSL processor Web server port> Set SSL processor Web server port. rts enable|disable Enable/disable RTS processing filt enable|disable Enable/disable filtering. add <filter ID, 1-2048> Add a filter. rem <filter ID, 1-2048> Remove a filter. cur Display current SSL processor configuration.

/cfg/setup Setup
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Spanning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces. For a complete description of how to use setup, see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration.”

406

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

To start the setup program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
>> Configuration# setup "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management Port, Port Speed/Mode,VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] ------------------------------------------------------------------

/cfg/dump Dump
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# dump

The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on page 408.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

407

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/ptcfg Saving the Active Switch Configuration
When the ptcfg command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP or FTP server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP/FTP server> <filename> {-tftp | ftp user name ftp password} [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data]

where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).

NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data.

/cfg/gtcfg Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
When the gtcfg command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically. To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP/FTP server> <filename> {-tftp | ftp user name ftp password} [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data]

408

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

409

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

410

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 7

The SLB Configuration Menu
Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Nortel Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing, each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand, it can become overutilized. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. With this software feature, the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server, based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Nortel Application Switch. Refer to your Nortel Application Switch Operating System Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.

411
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb SLB Configuration
[Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip wlm on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Workload Manager Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration

Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. To view menu options, see page 414. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. To view menu options, see page 423. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. To view menu options, see page 431. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. To view menu options, see page 445. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. To view menu options, see page 463.

412

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. To view menu options, see page 465. layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. To view menu options, see page 472. wap Displays WAP Menu. To view menu options, see page 477. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. To view menu options, see page 478. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 480. linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. To view menu options, see page 484. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 486. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. When the pip is defined, client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.To view options, see page 496. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. When this command is enabled, the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch, using Layer 2, without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. To view menu options, see page 497. wlm Displays the menu for workload management of servers. To view menu options, see page 498. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 509). Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow, deny, or NAT traffic.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

413

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage off Globally disables Layer 4 services. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved), but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration.

Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing)
Filters configured to allow, deny, or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated. These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu. Application Redirection filters, however, require Layer 4 software services. Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work.

/cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration
[Real Server 1 Menu] adv - Real Server Advanced Menu layer7 - Layer 7 Command Menu ids - IDS Command Menu rip - Set IP addr of real server name - Set real server name weight - Set weight for real server maxcon - Set maximum number of connections tmout - Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup - Set backup real server inter - Set interval between health checks retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr - Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP overflo - Enable/Disable backup on overflow addport - Add real port to server remport - Remove real port from server ena - Enable real server dis - Disable real server del - Delete real server cur - Display current real server configuration

414

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage adv Go to the Real Server Advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 421. layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. To view menu options, see page 421. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. To view menu options, see page 422. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. When this command is used, the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up, and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. name <string, maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. By default, each real server is given a weight setting of 1. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 429). avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

415

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. By default, the number of maximum connections is set at 200,000. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier, such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time, client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. If no backup servers/server group are configured, client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. When a client makes a request, the session is recorded in the table. The data is transferred until the client ends the session, and the session table entry is then removed. In certain circumstances, such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system, TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. In order to prevent table overflow, these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. Using the tmout option, you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes. The default setting is 10. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). When persistent is activated, this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails, use this option to assign a backup real server number. Then, if the real server becomes inoperative, the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. The backup server is also used in overflow situations. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit, the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time

416

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. For TCP services, the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service, using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. For UDP services, the switch pings servers to determine their status. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The default interval is 2 seconds. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default is 8 attempts overflo enable|disable Enable or disable backup upon overflow. addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. By default, this option is disabled. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. With this option enabled (default), a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation. When enabled, the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. When disabled, the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval. This command is enabled by default. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. By default, this option is disabled.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

417

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real)
Command Syntax and Usage ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. When enabled, the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. This option, when the apply and save commands are used, enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. See /oper/slb/ena on page 412 for an operations-level command. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. This option, when the apply and save commands are used, disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled.

NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.
See /oper/slb/dis on page 502 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. Use this command with caution, as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server.

418

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/real/adv
Real Server Advanced Menu
[Real Server 1 Advanced Menu] avail - Set Global SLB availability for real server remote - Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy - Enable/disable client proxy operation buddyhc - Buddy Server Menu fasthc - Enable/disable fast health check operation submac - Enable/disable source MAC address substitution subdmac - Enable/disable destination MAC address substitution cur - Display current real server advanced configuration

Table 7-3 Real Server Advanced Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage avail <server weight, 1-48> Set Global SLB availability for real server. remote enable|disable Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy enable|disable Enable/disable client proxy operation. buddyhc Go to the Buddy Server Menu. fasthc enable|disable Enable/disable fast health check operation. submac enable|disable Enable/disable source MAC address substitution. subdmac enable|disable Enable/disable destination MAC address substitution. cur enable|disable Display current real server advanced configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

419

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/real/adv/buddyhc
Buddy Server Health Check Menu
[Real server 1 Buddy Menu] addbd - Add Buddy Server delbd - Delete Buddy Server cur - Display current buddy server configuration

Table 7-4 Buddy Server Health Check Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage addbd <real server number 1-1023> <real server group 1-1024> <service 9-65534> Adds a buddy server. delbd <real server number 1-1023> <real server group 1-1024> <service 9-65534> Deletes a previously added buddy server. cur Displays the current buddy server configuration.

420

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7
Real Server Layer 7 Configuration
[Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb - Add SLB string for content load balance remlb - Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser - Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude - Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr - Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur - Display current real server configuration

This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. Table 7-5 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage addlb <defined SLB string ID, 1-1024> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server. remlb <defined SLB string ID, 1-1024> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. This server gets the client request, assigns the cookie, and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. By default, this option is disabled. exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching. By default, this option is disabled. ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server. LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers. You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory. You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server. The write server can conduct both read and write operations. cur Displays the current real server configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

421

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids
Real server IDS Configuration Menu
Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches, which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization). Refer to your Application Guide for more information.
[Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan - Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport - Set Port for ID Server oid - Override OID for SNMP HC comm - Override community string for SNMP HC cur - Display current real server configuration

Table 7-6 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids)
Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. idsport <port number> | none Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server. Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch. oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID). This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks. cur Displays the current real server configuration.

422

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration
[Real Server Group 1 Menu] metric - Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric - Set metric used to select next rport in server content - Set health check content health - Set health check type backup - Set backup real server or group name - Set real server group name realthr - Set real server failure threshold idsrprt - Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth - Set an advance group health check formula mhash - Set minmisses hash parameter wlm - Set Workload Manager number viphlth - Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids - Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld - Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper - Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena - Enable real server in this group dis - Disable real server in this group add - Add real server rem - Remove real server del - Delete real server group cur - Display current group configuration

This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups. Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing. Each group must consist of at least one real server. Each real server can belong to more than one group. Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request. The default setting is leastconns. See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 429 for more information. rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

423

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip|sipoptions|wts http - use GET method, httphead - use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. The default is tcp. See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 426. backup r<real server number (1-1023)>|g<group number (1-1024)>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails, use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number. Then, if the real server group becomes inoperative, the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit, the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. realthr <real servers (1-15, 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. If any time, the number reaches this minimum limit, a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. The default threshold is 0, which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server.

424

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3..), 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. This command supports two boolean operators, AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators, you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long, or you can also set the formula expression as none. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server. wlm <1 - 16> | none Set Workload Manager number. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. This feature is enabled by default. However, it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. When viphlth is disabled, the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks, whether DSR is enabled or disabled. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. When Intrusion Detection flood is enabled, packets are copied to all IDS servers in the IDS group. When this is disabled, packets are only copied to the load balanced IDS server within the IDS group. oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation. ena <real server number, 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. For example, if a real server is a member of more than one group, you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of. dis <real server number, 1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

425

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-7 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group. del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server, the virtual server will become inoperative. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group.

SLB Health Check Types
Using the health command, you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers. The health check options are described in the following table. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description.
>> Real Server Group 1# health Current health check type: Pending new health check type: Enter health check type:

tcp sipoptions

Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health)
Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. icmp For Layer 3 health checking, pings the server. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service.

426

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health)
Option and Description http For HTTP service, use HTTP 1.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. Otherwise, an HTTP/1.0 GET occurs. Note: If the content is not specified, the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL. dns For Domain Name Service, check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. pop3 For user mail service, check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. smtp For mail-server services, check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. nntp For newsgroup services, check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. ftp For FTP services, check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. imap For user mail service, check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. During the handshake, the user and server exchange security certificates, negotiate an encryption and compression method, and establish a session ID for each session.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

427

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health)
Option and Description radius-auth, radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication, check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Nortel Application Switch and the server. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server, the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. <n> denotes the health script number (1-64). udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 486) must also be configured. wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 486) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request, a bind result, and an unbind request. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server. If the server is up, it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. At regular intervals, the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server.

428

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-8 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health)
Option and Description rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP. The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes. If this is not the response, the health check will fail. sip Sets the health check type to sip. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing. sipoptions Sets the health check type to sipoptions. wts Sets the health check type to wts.

Server Load Balancing Metrics
Using the metric command, you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request.
>> Real Server Group 1# metric Current metric: leastconns Enter metric:

The metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric)
Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection, all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. This is particularly useful in caching applications, helping to maximize successful cache hits. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing, all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

429

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric)
Option and Description hash Like minmisses, the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. For Application Redirection, all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. For Server Load Balancing, all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance, it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers, consider using the hash metric. leastconns Least connections. With this option, the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. This option is the most self-regulating, with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time, due to their ability to accept, process, and shut down connections faster than slower servers. roundrobin Round robin. With this option, new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection, the second real server gets the next connection, followed by the third real server, and so on. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection, the issuing process starts over with the first real server. response Real server response time. With this option, the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. With this option, the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. The higher the bandwidth used, the smaller is the weight assigned to that server.

430

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-9 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric)
Option and Description phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. With phash enabled, the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. With the phash metric, the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. If the first hash hits a dead server, it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up.

NOTE – Under the leastconns, roundrobin, hash, and phash metrics, when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 415), a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics.

/cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration
[Virtual Server service ipver vip vname dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 creset ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP version Set IP addr of virtual server Set name of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable/disable client connection reset invalid VPORT Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration

This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters:

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

431

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-10 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name, such as http, ftp, the service number, and so on. The allowable port range is from 9 to 65534. To get more information about well-known ports, see the sport command on page 447. To view the services menu options, see page 434.

ipver <IP version (v4 or v6)> Set the IP version. vip <virtual server IP address for IPv4 or IPv6> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. dname <64 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization, and the Internet group code (.com, .edu, .gov, .org, and so forth). An example would be foocorp.com. It does not include the hostname portion (www, www2, ftp, and so forth). The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 64. To define the hostname, see hname below. To clear the dname, specify the name as none. vname <32 character virtual server name>|none Set name of virtual server. cont <BWM contract (1-1024)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service. By default, all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. However, the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. The default number of contracts is set at 1024 for Nortel Application Switch Operating System. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server. The higher the weight value, the more connections that will be directed to the local site. The default is 1. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs.

432

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-10 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server. addrule <rule, 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain. Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day. Each domain has one or more rules. Each rule has metric preference list. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. The default is rule 1. remrule <rule, 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain. layr3 disable|enable Normally, the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default), the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections, and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable, the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server. creset enable|disable Enable/disable client connection reset invalid VPORT. ena Enables this virtual server. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution, as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

433

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name>
Virtual Server Service Configuration
This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services. NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic. See page 444 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.
[Virtual Server wts http sip rtsp group rport hname cont pbind thash tmout dbind udp frag nonat dnsslb direct mirror epip del cur 1 14 Service Menu] WTS Load Balancing Menu HTTP Load Balancing Menu SIP Load Balancing Menu RTSP Load Balancing Menu Set real server group number Set real port Set hostname Set BW contract for this virtual service Set persistent binding type Set hash parameter Set minutes inactive connection remains open Enable/disable delayed binding Enable/disable UDP balancing Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses Enable/disable DNS query load balancing Enable/disable direct access mode Enable/disable session mirroring Enable/disable pip selection based egress port/vlan Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration

434

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage wts Go to the WTS Load Balancing Menu. To view the menu options, see

page 440.

http Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP. To view the menu options, see page 441. sip Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Nortel Application Switch Operating System. When enabled, you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating, modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261). The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side. Using SIP on your switch, you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server. When SIP is enabled, you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing. You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. To view the menu options, see page 442. rtsp Go to the RTSP Load Balancing Menu. To view the menu options, see

page 443.

group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. The default is set at 1. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 1024) of the real server group to add to this service. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. By default, this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>, the switch will map the virtual port to this real port.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

435

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example, to add a hostname for Web services, you could specify www as the hostname. If a dname of “foocorp.com” was defined (above), “www.foocorp.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. To clear the hostname for a service, use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications:

urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name, starting point of the cookie value, number of bytes to be extracted, enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB, based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value. others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-1024), 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. The default number of contracts is set at 1024 for Nortel Application Switch Operating System. Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract, it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. The default is set at 1024.

436

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections, such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer, HTTPS), Web site search results, or multi-page Web forms. The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier, and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out, they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). In Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2, with clientip command enabled, HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used, since the services are related. Whereas, different services from the same client may not map to the same server. The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. For more information on cookie option, see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 444. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence, see the Persistence chapter in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. SSL provides authentication, non-repudiation, and security. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. By enabling the sslid option, all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding, if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. The Nortel Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found, or until the maximum count is reached. The default number is 1. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash, phash, and minmisses SLB metrics. For example, the source IP address, or both source IP address and source port. If the user does not select any, the switch will use default hash parameter, which is sip.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

437

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. This option is disabled by default. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. For example, DNS uses UDP and TCP. In those environments, you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. When stateless is enabled, no session table entry is created. Since no session is created, you have to bind to a new server every time. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled, disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. For more information, see the cache command in Table 7-18 on page 452. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. This option is enabled by default. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). This option does not substitute IP addresses. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup, so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch. mirror disable|enable Enables or disables session mirroring on the selected virtual service. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol.

438

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-11 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)
Command Syntax and Usage epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. By default, the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. Using the epip command, you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution, as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

439

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/virt/service/wts
WTS Load Balancing Menu
[WTS Load Balancing Menu] userhash - Enable userhash when there is no Session Dir. Server ena - Enable WTS loadbalancing and persistence dis - Disable WTS loadbalancing and persistence cur - Display current WTS configuration

Table 7-12 WTS Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage userhash Enables the userhash if there is no session director server in the server platform. ena [true|false] Enable WTS load balancing. dis cur Display the current WTS configuration. [true|false] Disable WTS load balancing.

440

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/virt/service/http
HTTP Load Balancing Menu
[HTTP Load Balancing Menu] httpslb - Set HTTP SLB processing urlcont - Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service rcount - Set multi response count http - Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB xforward - Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode pooling - Enable/disable connection pooling for HTTP traffic cur - Display current HTTP configuration

Table 7-13 HTTP Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage httpslb Set HTTP SLB processing. urlcont Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service. rcount Set multi response count. http Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB. xforward Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode. pooling Enable/disable connection pooling for HTTP traffic. cur Display current HTTP configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

441

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/virt/service/sip
SIP Load Balancing Menu
[SIP Load Balancing Menu] sip - Enable/disable SIP load balancing sdpnat - Enable/disable SIP SDP Media Portal NAT cur - Display current SIP configuration

Table 7-14 SIP Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage sip Enable SIP load balancing. sdpnat Enable SIP SDP Media Portal NAT. cur Display the current SIP configuration.

442

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/virt/service/rtsp
RTSP Load Balancing Menu
[RTSP Load Balancing Menu] group - Set real server group number hname - Set hostname rtspslb - Set RTSP URL load balancing type thash - Set hash parameter softgrid - Enable/disable SoftGrid load balancing del - Delete virtual service cur - Display current virtual service configuration

Table 7-15 RTSP Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example, to add a hostname for Web services, you could specify www as the hostname. If a dname of “foocorp.com” was defined (above), “www.foocorp.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. To clear the hostname for a service, use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|l4hash|none This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb, either hash or patternMatch, thereby enabling the service. The default is hash. hash: If you use hash, RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance. patternMatch: If you select this option, the switch will match the string or pattern

within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server.

l4hash: The l4hash option configures Server Load Balancing to be based on the Layer 4 hash metric. none: If set at none, RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash, phash, and minmisses SLB metrics. For example, the source IP address, the destination IP address, or both source IP address and source port. If the user does not select any, the switch will use default hash parameter, which is sip. softgrid enable|disable Enable or disable softgrid load balancing.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

443

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-15 RTSP Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration.

Cookie-Based Persistence
The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence, and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table.
Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. In this mode, the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client. r: Rewrite mode. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode), the switch, and not the network administrator, generates the cookie value on behalf of the server. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. i: Insert mode. When a client sends a request without a cookie, the server responds with the data, and the switch inserts a persistence cookie into the data packet. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: ... a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e.g. 12/31/01@23:59) ... a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e.g. 45:30:90) ... or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64). For cookie rewrite, the extracting length must be 8 or 16. Look for cookie in the URI. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI, enter e to enable this option. To look for cookie in the HTTP header, enter d to disable this option.

444

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration
[Filter 1 Menu] adv - Filter Advanced Menu name - Set filter name smac - Set source MAC address dmac - Set destination MAC address ipver - Set Filter IP version sip - Set source IP address smask - Set source subnet mask/prefix len dip - Set destination IP address dmask - Set destination subnet mask/prefix len proto - Set IP protocol sport - Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport - Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action - Set action group - Set real server group for redirection rport - Set real server port for redirection nat - Set which addresses are network address translated vlan - Set vlan id invert - Enable/disable filter inversion ena - Enable filter dis - Disable filter del - Delete filter cur - Display current filter configuration

The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters. Each filter can be configured to allow, deny, redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications, and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters. This command is disabled by default. There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv, page 450) that can be used to provide more information through syslog. The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports
Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

445

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

TCP flags ICMP message type The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address, masks, and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow, deny, redirect, nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Nortel Application Switch port Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 450. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. smac any|<MAC address (such as, 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address. The default is any. dmac any|<MAC address (such as, 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. The default is any. ipver v4 | v6 Sets the IP version that the filter will use. Filtering using IPv6 is only supported in bridge mode. sip sip <IP4 address (eg, 192.4.17.101)> | <IP6 address (eg, 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234 or 3001::abcd:1234)> If defined, traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or colon notation for IPv6, or any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. smask <IP4 subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0> | <IP6 prefix length (eg, 64)> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. See details below for more information on producing address ranges. For more information, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 449.

446

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage dip <IP4 address (eg, 192.4.17.101)> | <IP6 address (eg, 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234 or 3001::abcd:1234)> If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation for IPv4 or colon notation for IPv6, or any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. For more information, see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 449. dmask <IP4 subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)> | <IP6 prefix length (eg, 64)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. proto any|<number>|<name> If defined, traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. Specify the protocol number, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. Number 1 2 6 17 58 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp icmp6 ospf vrrp

sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”. The default is any. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

447

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined, traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. Specify the port number, range, name, or “any”, just as with sport above. The default is set at any. action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. This can be used for building basic security profiles. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile, such as for web cache redirection. In addition, Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 412). Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter, effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. To specify the new filter to goto, use the /cfg.slb/filt/adv/goto command. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. For valid Layer 4 health checks, this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. Also, if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Nortel Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-28 on page 463), rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. The default is set at 0. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above), this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. If source is specified, the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. If dest is specified, the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values.

nat

goto

448

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-16 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 - 4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. The default is any, which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis, and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. A VLAN has a set of member ports. But by applying this filter to a VLAN, the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. You have to manually add the filter to the port. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. If the conditions of the filter are met, don’t act. If the conditions for the filter are not met, perform the assigned action. This option is disabled by default. When using filter inversion for IPv6, be aware the Neighbor Solicitations (NSol) are filtered out if no appropriate NSol filter was set up before inversion. ena Enables this filter. dis Disables this filter. del Deletes this filter. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter.

Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters
You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. When a range of IP addresses is needed, the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range, and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. For example, to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch, the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

449

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

As another example, you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet. To do this, you could define the following parameters: Table 7-17 Filtering IP Address Ranges
Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 128.0.0.0 255.255.255.255

128.0.0.0 128.0.0.0

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv
Advanced Filter Configuration
[itr1Avne Mn] Fle dacd eu 82p 01 -821 Avne Mn 0.p dacd eu tp c -TPAvne Mn C dacd eu -I Avne Mn P dacd eu i p lyr ae7 -Lyr7Avne Mn ae dacd eu poyd -PoyAvne Mn rxav rx dacd eu rdr ei -RdrcinAvne Mn eieto dacd eu scrt -Scrt Mn euiy euiy eu im cp -StIM msaetp e CP esg ye cn ot -StB cnrc e W otat rvot -StB cnrc frtervressin ecn e W otat o h ees eso -StNTo L lou ssintmot e A r 7 okp eso ieu tot mu isr dgp -StISsre gopfrituindtcinSB e D evr ru o nrso eeto L isah -Sths prmtrfrituindtcinSB dhs e ah aaee o nrso eeto L tah hs -Sths prmtrfrFle e ah aaee o itr gt oo -StGT fle I e OO itr D rvre -Eal/ial cetn ssinrvresd tafc ees nbedsbe raig eso ees ie rfi cce ah -Eal/ial ccigssin ta mthfle nbedsbe ahn esos ht ac itr lg o -Eal/ial lgig nbedsbe ogn mro irr -Eal/ial ssinmroig nbedsbe eso irrn cr u -Dslycretavne fle cniuain ipa urn dacd itr ofgrto

450

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-18 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. IEEE 802.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net-

work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. Using this command you can preserve 802.1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch.

To view menu options, see page 453. tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 453. ip Sets IP advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 454. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. To view menu options, see page 457. proxyadv Displays the Proxy Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 460. icmp any|<number>|<type; "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. The default is set at any. For a list of ICMP message types, see Table 7-22 on page 455. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP, see the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. cont <BWM Contract (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. By default, the contract number is set at 1024. revcont <BW Contract (1-1024)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. The default is set at 4 minutes. idsgrp <real server group number (1-1024)>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing. When filtering is used for IDSLB, each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip), destination IP (dip), or both.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

451

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-18 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. The Default is auto. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to. In order to use this feature, the action on this filter must be set to goto. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch, so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. Cache is enabled by default. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 438). log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. This option is disabled by default. mirror disable|enable Enables or disables session mirroring. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.

452

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p
802.1p Advanced Menu
This feature provides the Nortel Application Switch Operating System the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.
[802.1p Advanced Menu] value - Set 802.1p value match - Enable/disable 802.1p value matching cur - Display current 802.1p configuration

Table 7-19 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p)
Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure. match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802.1p value. When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination, the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete. cur Displays current 802.1p configuration.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp
Advanced Filter TCP Configuration
[TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] - Enable/disable TCP URG matching - Enable/disable TCP ACK matching - Enable/disable TCP PSH matching - Enable/disable TCP RST matching - Enable/disable TCP SYN matching - Enable/disable TCP FIN matching - Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching - Display current TCP configuration

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

453

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags. Table 7-20 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp)
Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. By default, this option is disabled. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip
IP Advanced Menu
[IP Advanced Menu] tos - Set IP Type of Service tmask - Set IP TOS mask newtos - Set new IP TOS length - Set IP maximum packet length option - Enable/disable IP option matching cur - Display current IP configuration

454

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-21 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. For more information on ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask. newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. length <IP packet length (in bytes), 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of the IP packet’s length, including the IPv4 or IPv6 IP header. Any packet equal or exceeding the specified length will not match the filter. This option supports both IPv4 and IPv6 packets. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter.

ICMP Message Types
The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command. Table 7-22 ICMP Message Types
Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

455

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-22 ICMP Message Types
Type # Message Type 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply

456

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7
Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu
[Layer 7 Advanced Menu] sip - Layer 7 SIP Menu urlcont - Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd - Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd - Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr - Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr - Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp - Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap - Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa - Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup - Enable/disable layer 7 content lookup parseall - Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur - Display current layer 7 configuration

Table 7-23 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage sip Go to the Layer 7 SIP menu. To view the menu options, see page 459. urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping. Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add. This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id, then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID. remrd <string id to redirect from (1-1024)> <string id to redirect to (2-1024)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

457

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-23 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter.

Radius snooping allows the Nortel Application Switch Operating System to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing. For more details, please refer to your Application Guide.
rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet, it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. For more details, please refer to your Application Guide. ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server, the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT), that is PIP:PPORT. By default, this option is disabled. l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Nortel Application Switch Operating System. When enabled, the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. When combined with a filter action (for example, deny, redir), this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. This command is enabled by default, and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. However, some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. Once this packet is found, subsequent packets can be ignored. When parseall is disabled, layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings.

458

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <num> /adv/layer7/sip
Layer 7 SIP Menu
[Layer 7 SIP Menu] rtpcont - Set BW contract for the SIP RTP sessions sipp - Enable/disable SIP parsing cur - Display current SIP configuration

Table 7-24 Layer 7 SIP Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7/sip)
Command Syntax and Usage rtpcont <BW contract> Set BW contract for the SIP RTP sessions. sipp enable|disable Enable or disable SIP parsing. cur Displays the current advanced SIP configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

459

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt/adv/proxyadv
Proxy Advanced Menu
[Proxy Advanced proxyip epip proxy cur Menu] Set client proxy IP address Enable/disable pip selection based egress port/vlan Enable/disable client proxy Display current proxy configuration

Table 7-25 Proxy Advanced Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage proxyip <IP_address> Set the client proxy IP_address. epip enable|disable Enable or diable PIP selection based on the outgoing port or VLAN. proxy enable|disable Enable or disable client proxy. cur Shows all Proxy statistics.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security
SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu
[Security Menu] ratelim - Rate Limiting Menu addgrp - Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering remgrp - Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering pmatch - Enable/disable pattern matching matchall - Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering parsechn - Enable/disable chained pgroup match criteria for l7 filtering parseall - Enable/disable pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets cur - Display current Security configuration

460

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-26 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security)
Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. Currently, the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP, UDP, and ICMP protocols. To view menu options see page 462. addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. matchall disable|enable

Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action.
parsechn enable|disable Enable/disable chained pgroup match criteria for l7 filtering. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. This command is enabled by default, and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. However, some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. Once this packet is found, subsequent packets can be ignored. When parseall is disabled, pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. cur Displays the current configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

461

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim
Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu
[Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP, UDP, or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP, UDP, or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration

Table 7-27 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim)
Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. timewin <seconds, 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. holddur <minutes, 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit, any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. When blocking occurs, the client is said to be held down. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes, after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. The supported protocols are: TCP, UDP, and ICMP. dis Disables TCP, UDP, or ICMP rate limiting. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration.

462

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration
[SLB port 1 Menu] client - Enable/disable client processing server - Enable/disable server processing rts - Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan - Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw - Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy - Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt - Enable/disable filtering add - Add filter to port rem - Remove filter from port idslb - Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur - Display current port configuration

Nortel Application Switch Operating System switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis, expanding your topology options. NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port, it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. To make port filter changes take effect immediately, clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 502). Table 7-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port)
Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing, the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic. Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address, re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. This option is disabled by default. server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch, directly or through a hub, router, or another switch. When server processing is enabled, the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. This option is disabled by default.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

463

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port)
rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. This option is disabled by default. For more information on using rts, see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. This option is disabled by default. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. When the PIP is defined, client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. In Server Load Balancing applications, this forces response traffic to return through the switch, rather than around it, as is possible in complex routing environments. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). When pip is used with Application Redirection filters, each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 446). This option is disabled by default. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. This option is disabled by default. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. For example, 1-100. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. For example, 1-100. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port. In Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2, IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled. In the case of client processing, IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB.This option is disabled by default. cur Displays the current system parameters.

464

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration
Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine. In addition, GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates. The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP). DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP. For more information, please refer to your Application Guide.s
[Global SLB Menu] site - Remote Site Menu network - Network Preference Menu rule - Rule Menu version - Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port - Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter - Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap - Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap - Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) smask - Set source IP subnet mask for DNS persistence cache timeout - Set timeout in minutes for DNS persistence cache mincon - Set sessions available capacity threshold noresp - Set DNS response code when no server is returned dns - Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk - Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http - Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern - Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem - Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt - Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on - Globally turn Global SLB ON off - Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur - Display current Global SLB configuration

Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site. To view menu options, see page 467. network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu. To view menu options, see page 469.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

465

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu. To view menu options, see page 470. version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the

remote site updates.
port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. The default TCP port is 80. sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds, 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. The default configuration is 90%. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. The default configuration is 90%. smask <set IP4 subnet mask (eg, 255.255.255.0)> OR smask <set IP6 prefix len (eg, 64)> Set source IP subnet mask for DNS persistence cache. timeout <timeout in minutes, 1-1440> Set timeout in minutes for DNS persistence cache. mincon <available sessions threshold, 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. This option is enabled by default. hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. When enabled, the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration, in addition to the domain name, will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. When disabled, only the domain name will be used to match. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. When enabled (default), this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. If disabled, the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects, but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request.

466

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-29 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect, the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. This option is disabled by default. If usern is enabled, the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. If enabled, the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. For HTTP protocols, if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing, you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. If disabled, the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 509). off Turns GSLB off for this switch. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other, but will not hand off requests to this switch. By default, GSLB is turned off. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration.

/cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number>
GSLB Remote Site Configuration
The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain. Each domain has one or more sites. Each site has a virtual server for the domain. Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. Each virtual service has a group of real servers. Each virtual server has a domain name. Each virtual service has a host name. The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

467

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

At a local site for a domain, there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server. The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers. The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites.
[Remote site 1 Menu] prima - Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon - Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name - Set remote site name update - Enable/disable remote site updates ena - Enable remote site dis - Disable remote site del - Delete remote site cur - Display current remote site configuration

Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. Table 7-30 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site)
Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing. Use dotted decimal notation. secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch, enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here. If the remote site primary switch fails, the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site. The default is set at none. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. If enabled (default), this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. If disabled, the switch will not send state updates. If your local firewall does not permit this traffic, disable the updates. Note: When update is enabled, Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. By default, the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Webbased interface also uses port 80. Both services cannot use the same port. If both are enabled, configure the Nortel Application Switch Operating System Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 288). ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing.

468

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-30 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site)
Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration. cur Displays the current remote site configuration.

/cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number>
GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu
Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain. The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain. Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set.
[Network 1 Menu] sip - Set source IP address mask - Set source IP and network netmask addvirt - Add virtual server to network remvirt - Remove virtual server from network addreal - Add remote real server to network remreal - Remove remote real server from network ena - Enable network dis - Disable network del - Delete network cur - Display current network configuration

Table 7-31 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network)
Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option. mask <IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

469

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-31 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network)
Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network. No virtual server is added by default. remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network. remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network. ena Enables the network. dis Disables the network. del Deletes the network entry. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration.

/cfg/slb/gslb/rule
GSLB Rule Configuration Menu
Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. You can configure one or more rules on each domain. Each rule has a metric preference list. The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule.
[Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur 470

-

Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-32 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule)
Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. To view menu options, see page 472. start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. The default is zero. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule. The default is zero. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds, with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load, but will generate more DNS traffic. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic, but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. The default is 2 records. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name. Default is none. ena Enables the rule. dis Disables the rule. del Deletes the rule. cur Displays the current rule configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

471

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric
Global SLB Rule Metric Menu
[Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric - Set metric to use to select next server addnet - Add network to gmetric=network remnet - Remove network from gmetric=network cur - Display current metric configuration

Table 7-33 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric)
Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB. The default is none. addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric. This command applies only if you select network as the metric. remnet <1-128> Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric.

/cfg/slb/layer7
Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu
[Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir - Web Cache Redirection Menu slb - Server Load Balancing Menu sdp - SIP SDP Menu dbindtm - Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur - Display current Layer 7 configuration

Table 7-34 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. To view menu options, see page 473.

472

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-34 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7)
Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. To view menu options, see page 475. sdp Displays the SIP SDP Menu. To view menu options, see page 477. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration.

/cfg/slb/layer7/redir
Web Cache Redirection Configuration
[Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal - Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie - Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache - Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash - Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header - Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur - Display current WCR configuration

Table 7-35 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir)
Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server. If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server. This option is enabled by default.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

473

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-35 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir)
Command Syntax and Usage cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server. If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. This option is disabled by default. nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. If this command is enabled, the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1.1 header, or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0 header to the origin server. If this command is disabled, the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1.1 header, or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1.0 header to a cache server or origin server. This option is enabled by default. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI. If hashing is enabled, you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. If hashing is disabled, the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key. This option is disabled by default. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. This option is disabled by default. cur Displays the current URL expression table.

474

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/layer7/slb
Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu
[Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message - Set HTTP error message addstr - Add SLB string for load balance remstr - Remove SLB string for load balance rename - Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth - Add HTTP method type remmeth - Remove HTTP method type case - Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont - Set BW contract for the SLB string cur - Display current configuration

Table 7-36 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. The default message is “No available server to handle this request.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match. If you choose l7lkup string, you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup. If you choose pattern string, you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame. These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching. remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing. addmeth <Method, 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software. HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request. Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 supports 22 request methods by default. The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers. All other methods are optional. You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu. A method is case-sensitive. The software supports both HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1 to perform HTTP request methods.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

475

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-36 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software. case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching. Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. If you disable case sensitive, all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison. cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-1024]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods.

476

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/layer7/sdp
SDP Mapping Menu
[SDP Mapping Menu] add - Add SDP mapping rem - Remove SDP mapping cur - Display current SDP mapping configuration

Table 7-37 SDP Mapping Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <private IP> <public IP> Add SDP mapping. rem <private IP> Remove SDP mapping. cur Display current SDP mapping configuration.

/cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration
[WAP Options Menu] tpcp - Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug - WAP debug level cur - Display current WAP configuration

Table 7-38 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap)
Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests. This option is disabled by default. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. The default is set at 0. cur Displays the current WAP configuration

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

477

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration
[Config Synchronization Menu] peer - Synch Peer Switch Menu filt - Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports - Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios - Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips - Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips - Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm - Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state - Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update - Set stateful failover update period cur - Display current Layer 4 sync configuration

To synchronize the configuration between two switches, a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. Peers are sent SLB, FILT, and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. Table 7-39 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync)
Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. This option is enabled by default. To view menu options, see page 479. filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. This option is disabled by default. ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. This option is enabled by default. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. This option is enabled by default. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses. This option is disabled by default. peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses. Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration. This option is disabled by default.

478

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-39 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync)
Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches. This option is enabled by default. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. This option is disabled by default. update <seconds, 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries, if any, to the backup switch at the specified update interval. The default value is 30 seconds. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration.

/cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number>
Peer Switch Configuration
[Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr - Set peer switch IP address ena - Enable peer switch dis - Disable peer switch del - Delete peer switch cur - Display current peer switch configuration

To synchronize the configuration between two switches, a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. Table 7-40 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch. By default, this option is disabled. dis Disables the peer for this switch.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

479

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-40 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration.

/cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration
[Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk - SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport - Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask - Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet - Set management network mmask - Set management subnet mask pmask - Set persistent mask intrval - Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim - Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac - Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct - Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace - Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix - Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture vmasport - Enable/disable VMA with source port tpcp - Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat - Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan - Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup pvlantag - Enable/disable preserving vlan tag during packet forwarding portbind - Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage - Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage - Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur - Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration

Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu. To view menu options, see page 483.

480

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server. In other words, this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor. To view menu options, see page 483. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. The default is 255.255.255.255. mnet <IP address> If defined, management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers. The default is 255.255.255.255. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)> Sets persistent mask. The default is 255.255.255.255. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received. At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim. allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit, the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution. Typically, the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. But if you enable this command, the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. By default, this option is disabled.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

481

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure. Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information, see “Service Failure” in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide). By default, this option is disabled. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Nortel Application Switch. By default, this option is enabled. vmasport enable|disable Enable/disable VMA with source port. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. By default, this option is disabled. vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. pvlantag Enable/disable preserving vlan tag during packet forwarding. portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. The default interval is two seconds. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. If a large value of fastage is used, a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. The default is 0. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. The default interval is two minutes. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds, which causes the time to double per increment). The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. If a large value of slowage is used, a session can remain in the session table for months. The default is 0.

482

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-41 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration.

/cfg/slb/adv/synatk
SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu
[SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval - Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld - Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur - Display current SYN attack detection configuration

Table 7-42 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk)
Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.

/cfg/slb/adv/smtport
Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu
[SMT Real Port Menu] add - Add real port remove - Remove real port cur - Display real port configuration

Table 7-43 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport)
Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

483

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-43 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport)
Command Syntax and Usage remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor. cur Displays real port configuration.

/cfg/slb/linklb
Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu
[Inbound Linklb drecord group ttl ena dis cur Menu] Domain Record Menu Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration

Table 7-44 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb)
Command Syntax and Usage drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. To view menu options, see page 485. group <real server group number (1-1023)> Sets the real server ISP group number. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records. ena Enables inbound link load balancing. dis Disables inbound link load balancing. cur Displays current inbound link load configuration.

484

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/linklb/drecord
Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu
[Domain Record <domain_number> Menu] entry - Virt Real Mapping Menu domain - Set Domain Name ena - Enable Domain Record dis - Disable Domain Record del - Delete Domain Record cur - Display current Domain Record configuration

Table 7-45 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord)
Command Syntax and Usage entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers. See page 452 to view menu options. domain <64 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name. Default is none. ena Enables the domain records. dis Disables the domain records. del Deletes the domain records. cur Displays the current domain records.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

485

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry
Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu
[Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt - Set Virtual Server Number real - Set Real Server Number ena - Enable Entry dis - Disable Entry del - Delete Entry cur - Display current Entry configuration

Table 7-46
Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number, 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping. real Defines the real server number for mapping. ena Enables the entry for drecords. dis Disables the entry for drecords. del Deletes the entry for drecords. cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries.

/cfg/slb/advhc
Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu
[Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script - Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc - SNMP Health Check Menu waphc - WAP Health Check Menu aphttp - Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver - LDAP version secret - Set RADIUS secret minter - Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur - Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration

486

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-47 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc)
Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-64)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 488. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 490. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. To view menu options, see page 492. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. By default, this option is disabled. When disabled, you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port, like HTTPs. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. The default is 2. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server, the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. The default is none. minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. The default is set at 10. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

487

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/advhc/script <health script number>
Scriptable Health Checks Configuration
Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers. With these health checks, the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked. So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked. The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes. Up to 64 scripts can be configured.
[Health Script 1 Menu] open - Add open command to end of script send - Add send command to end of script bsend - Add binary send command to end of script nsend - Add additional send binary string to end of script expect - Add expect command to end of script bexpect - Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect - Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset - Add offset command to end of script depth - Add depth command to end of script wait - Add wait command to end of script close - Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem - Remove last command from script del - Delete script cur - Display current script configuration

Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script)
Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check. You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP), and the port number. send <text string (TCP), hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.

488

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script)
Command Syntax and Usage nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered. Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length. expect <text string (TCP), hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires, the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. offset <offset, 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command. If you need to specify offset, you must do it after executing the bexpect command. depth <depth, 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area, or beginning from offset if offset was specified, to search for the bexpect content. wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. If the expected response is received within the wait window, the health check passes, otherwise the health check fails. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds. close Closes TCP connection. rem Removes the last entered line from the script. del Deletes the current script.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

489

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-48 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Lists the current script configuration.

/cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc
SNMP Health Check Configuration
[SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid - OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm - Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt - Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert - Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight - Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del - Delete SNMP health check cur - Display current SNMP health check configuration

Table 7-49 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc)
Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier, such as, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file, for example, an OID is of the form 1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.7.11. comm <community string, maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet. The default community string is public. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value. When the invert option is enabled, the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field. weight disable|enable When enabled, the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response. del Deletes the current SNMP health check.

490

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-49 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc)
Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

491

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc
WAP Health Check Configuration
Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways, and the switch verifies the expected response, in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol, ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203. Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. The Nortel Application Switch Operating System allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP, WTP+WSP, WTLS+WSP, WTLS+WTP+WSP), deployed on WAP gateways/servers. For further details, refer to the Application Guide.
[WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt - WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt - WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport - WSP port number to health check wtpport - WTP port number to health check wtlswsp - WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt - WTLS port number to health check couple - Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur - Display current WAP health check configuration

Table 7-50 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc)
Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu. To view menu options, see page 494. wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. To view menu options, see page 495. wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. The default port number is 9200. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check. The default port number is 9201.

492

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 7-50 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc)
Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP, WTP+WSP, WTLS+WSP, WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails, then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

493

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt
WSP Content Health Check
[WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset - Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt - Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt - Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur - Display current WSP health check content configuration

Table 7-51 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt)
Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.

494

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt
WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu
This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic.
[WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset - Offset in received WSP PDU connect - CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt - GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt - REPLY PDU to be received from cur - Display current WTP+WSP health

WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration

Table 7-52 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt)
Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU, at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet. connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

495

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/pip
Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu
You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command. You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN. You can configure up to 1024 proxy IP addresses on a per switch basis.
[Proxy IP Address Menu] type - Set base type of Proxy IP address add - Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem - Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur - Display current Proxy IP address configuration

Table 7-53 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip)
Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address, whether it is port-based or VLAN-based. add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address. rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address. This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.

496

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/peerpip
SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu
When this command is enabled, the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch, using Layer 2, without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add - Add peer Proxy IP address rem - Rem peer Proxy IP address cur - Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration

Table 7-54 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip)
Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer. rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer. cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

497

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/cfg/slb/wlm
WorkLoad Management Menu
[Workload Manager 1 Menu] addr - Set IP address for Workload Manager port - Set port for Workload Manager del - Delete Workload Manager cur - Display current Workload Manager configuration

Table 7-55 Workload Manager Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP_address> Set the IP address for the Workload Manager. port <TCP_port> Set the port number for the Workload Manager. del Delete the Workload Manager. cur Shows all Workload Manager statistics. For example: Current Workload Manager 1: IP address Port 0.0.0.0 0

498

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 8

The Operations Menu
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured operation.

/oper Operations Menu
[Operations Menu] port - Operational Port Menu slb - Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp - Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm - Operational Bandwidth Management Menu security - Operational Security Menu ip - Operational IP Menu swkey - Enter key to enable software feature rmkey - Enter software feature to be removed passwd - Change current user password clrlog - Clear syslog messages displog - Turn on/off display syslog msgs to telnet/ssh sessions defalias - Set default port alias ntpreq - Send NTP request

The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Nortel Application Switch AD4 and Nortel Application Switch 184 Web Switches.

499
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 501. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. To view menu options, see page 502. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options, see page 505. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 505. security Go to the Operational Security menu. To view menu options, see page 506. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu, which has one sub-menu/option, the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 505. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature. For details, see page 509. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed. For details, see page 510. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. displog on|off Turn on/off display syslog msgs to telnet/ssh sessions defalias Set the default port alias. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server.

500

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options
[Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon - Enable/Disable RMON for port ena - Enable port dis - Disable port cur - Current port state

Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port, and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port)
Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. ena Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. dis Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. cur Displays the current settings for the port.

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

501

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options
[Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group - Real Server Group Menu gslb - Global SLB Operations Menu sync - Synchronize SLB, VRRP and other configurations on peers ena - Enable real server dis - Disable real server sessdel - Delete session table entry clear - Clear session table cur - Current layer 4 operational state

When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled, the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches. Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 503. gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu. To view menu options, see page 504. sync Synchronizes the SLB, filter, VRRP, port, Bandwidth Management configuration, and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address). To take effect, peers must be configured on the Nortel Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical. ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.

502

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb)
Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number, 1-1023> [P - allow persistent http 1.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1.0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset.

NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server. For more information, see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Application Guide.
sessdel Delete session table entry. clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately.

NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions.
cur Displays the current SLB operational state.

/oper/slb/group
Real Server Group Operations
[Real server group 1 Menu] ena - Enable real server in this group dis - Disable real server in this group cur - Current server group operational state

Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group.

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

503

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group)
Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group. cur Displays current operational state of the server group.

/oper/slb/gslb
Global SLB Operations Menu
[Global SLB Operations Menu] query - Query Global SLB selection add - Add entry to Global SLB DNS persistence cache arem - Remove all entries Global SLB DNS persistence cache

Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb)
Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection. add Add an entry to the Global SLB DNS persistence cache. arem Remove all entries Global SLB DNS persistence cache.

504

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options.
[VRRP Operations Menu] back - Set virtual router to backup

Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-1024)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. When this command is executed, the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). After the new election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.

/oper/bwm
Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options
[Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist - Send BW History to SMTP server clear - Clear BWM IP user entry table

Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist)
Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 316). clear Clear the BWM IP user entry table.

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

505

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/security
Security Menu
[Security Menu] ipacl - IP ACL Operations Menu

Table 8-8 Security Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Go to the IP ACL Operation menu. To view menu options, see page 506

/oper/security/ipacl
IP ACL Operations Menu
[IP ACL Operations Menu] add - Add operations source IP Address/Mask rem - Remove operations source IP Address/Mask arem - Remove all operations source IP Address/Mask dadd - Add operations destination IP Address/Mask drem - Remove operations destination IP Address/Mask darem - Remove all operations destination IP Address/Mask cfg - Display configuration IP Address/Mask bogon - Display bogon IP Address/Mask oper - Display operations IP Address/Mask cur - Display all IP Address/Mask

Table 8-9 IP ACL Operations Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP subnet mask> <timeout in minutes, 1-10080> Add the operations source IP mask. rem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove the operations source IP mask. arem Remove all operations source IP addresses and Masks. dadd <IP address> <IP subnet mask> <timeout in minutes, 1-10080> Add an operations destination IP address and Mask. drem <IP address> <IP subnet mask> Remove an operations destination IP address and Mask.

506

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 8-9 IP ACL Operations Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage darem Remove all of the operations destination IP addresses and Masks. cfg Display all configuration IP addresses and Masks. For example: Current configuration IP ACL settings: 0 configuration source IP ACL. 0 configuration destination IP ACL. bogon Display bogon IP address and Mask. For example: >> IP ACL Operations# bogon Current bogon IP ACL settings: 0 bogon source IP ACL. oper Display operations IP addresses and Masks. For example: Current operations IP ACL settings: 0 operations source IP ACL. 0 operations destination IP ACL. cur Display all IP addresses and Masks. For example: Current total IP ACL settings: 0 total source IP ACL. 0 total destination IP ACL. Current configuration IP ACL settings: 0 configuration source IP ACL. 0 configuration destination IP ACL. Current bogon IP ACL settings: 0 bogon source IP ACL. Use "bogon" command to display. Current operations IP ACL settings: 0 operations source IP ACL. 0 operations destination IP ACL.

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

507

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options
[IP Operations Menu] bgp - Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu garp - Send gratuitous arp

Table 8-10 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu. To view the menu options see page 508. garp <IP address> <Vlan number> Send gratuitous arp.

/oper/ip/bgp
Operations-Level BGP Options
[Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state

Table 8-11 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session. stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session. cur Displays the current BGP operational state.

508

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/oper/swkey Activating Optional Software
The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Before you can activate optional software, you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key, you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Nortel Application Switch Operating System switch that will run the optional software. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. Once you have your License Password, perform the following actions: 1. 2. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1, “The Command Line Interface”). At the Main# prompt, enter:
Main# oper

3.

At the Operations# prompt, enter:
Operations# swkey

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

509

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

4.

When prompted, enter your 16-digit software key code. For example:
Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as, 123456789ABCDEF)>

If the correct code is entered, you will see the following message:
Valid software key entered. Software feature enabled.

/oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software
The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. To review the deactivation options, enter the following at the Operations Menu:
>> Operations# ? rmk Usage: rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSLB||BWM|Security|Linklb|ITM)>

To deactivate optional software, enter the following at the Operations Menu:
Operations# rmkey

When prompted, enter the code for software to be removed. For example:
Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]|BWM|Security: GSLB

510

Chapter 8: The Operations Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 9

The Boot Options Menu
To use the Boot Options Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP

/boot Boot Menu
[Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] - Scheduled Switch Reset Menu - Select software image to use on next boot - Select config block to use on next boot - Download new software image via TFTP - Upload selected software image via TFTP - Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] - Display current boot options

Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.

511
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Scheduled Reboot of the Switch
This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. You can set the reboot time, cancel a previously scheduled reboot, and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu:

/boot/sched
Scheduled Reboot Menu
[Boot Schedule Menu] set - Set switch reset time cancel - Cancel pending switch reset cur - Display current switch reset schedule

The cur option displays the current scheduled reboot time. For example:
>> Boot Schedule# cur Currently scheduled reboot time: none

Updating the Switch Software Image
The switch software image is the executable code running on the Nortel Application Switch. A version of the image ships with the switch, and comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of the image are released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset

512

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Downloading New Software to Your Switch
The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1 and image2, as well as boot software, called boot. When you download new software, you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1, image2, or boot. For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1), if needed. To download a new software to your switch, you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. However, note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 379). When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# gtimg

2.

Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced:
Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image>

3.

Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server.
Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address>

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

513

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

4.

Enter the name of the new software file on the server.
Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename>

The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. However, the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). 5. The system prompts you to confirm your request. You should next select a software image to run, as described below.

Selecting a Software Image to Run
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# image

2.

Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:

Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# ptimg

2.

The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file-

name>

514

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server:
Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address>

4.

Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server:
Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename>

5.

The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded, enter Y.
image2 currently contains Software Version 20.2.0.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192.1.1.1. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y

Selecting a Configuration Block
When you make configuration changes to the Nortel Application Switch, you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Nortel Application Switch was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured Nortel Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# conf

2.

Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use:

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

515

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:

516

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Resetting the Switch
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. This process can be lengthy, depending on the topology of your network. To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
>> Boot Options# reset

You are prompted to confirm your request.

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

517

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

518

Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 10

The Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.

/maint Maintenance Menu
NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.
[Maintenance Menu] sys - System Maintenance Menu fdb - Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp - ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route - IP Route Manipulation Menu ip6 - IP6 Manipulation Menu debug - Debugging Menu uudmp - Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP cldmp - Clear FLASH dump lsdmp - List FLASH dump panic - Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp - Tech support dump pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP sslrst - Reset SSL card

Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Nortel Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The panic option, found in the Maintenance Menu, causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory, and then causes the switch to reboot.

519
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port. The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->. The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 522. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 522. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 523. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 525. ip6 Displays the IPv6 Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 526. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 527. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see page 528. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information using TFTP. For details, see page 529. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see page 529. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. For details, see page 530. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details, see page 530. tsdmp Dumps all Nortel Application Switch information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump output into a file, and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. For details, see page 531.

520

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage pttsdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [-mgmt|-data] Upload tech support dump using FTP/TFTP. For details, see page 531. sslrst Reset the SSL card. For details, see page 531.

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

521

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/sys System Maintenance Options
This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group. The options are used to perform system debugging.
[System Maintenance Menu] flags - Set NVRAM flag word sfpinfo - Show SFP information

Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group. sfpinfo <port_number> Show the SFP information. For example: >> System Maintenance# sfpinfo 1 Probing SFP on port 1 - please wait Invalid: Port 1 does not support SFP's

/maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options
[FDB Manipulation Menu] find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port - Show FDB entries for a single port trunk - Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan - Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt - Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump - Show all FDB entries del - Delete an FDB entry clear - Clear entire FDB

The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.
522 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). port <port number, 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. Use “0” for unknown port number. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 90. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.

/maint/arp ARP Cache Options
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find - Show a single ARP entry by IP address port - Show ARP entries on a single port vlan - Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt - Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump - Show all ARP entries clear - Clear ARP cache addr - Show ARP address list

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

523

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port. See page 524 for a sample output. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port. dump Shows all ARP entries. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.

/maint/arp/port <port number>
ARP Entries on a Single Port
IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----- --------------47.80.16.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47.80.16.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47.80.17.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty

NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch, or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find, port, vlan, refpt, dump), you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 112.

524

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show a single route by destination IP address gw - Show routes to a single gateway type - Show routes of a single type tag - Show routes of a single tag if - Show routes on a single interface dump - Show all routes clear - Clear route table

Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP4 address (eg, 192.4.17.101)> | <IP6 address (eg, 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway IP4 address (eg, 192.4.17.44)> <default gateway IP6 address (eg, 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:1234) Shows routes to a default gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 109 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-20 on page 109 if <interface number (1-255)> Shows routes on a single interface. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.

NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 108.

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

525

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/ip6 IPv6 Manipulation Menu
[IP6 Menu] nbrcache - Neighbor Cache Manipulation Menu

Table 10-6 IPv6 Manipulation Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage nbrcache Opens the Neighbor Cache menu whose only option is the clear command. This command is used to clear the IPv6 Neighbor Cache table.

526

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/debug Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf - Show MP trace buffer sptb - Show SP trace buffer spall - Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg - Clear all flash configs portmap - Show port-SP-MAC mapping vmasp - Show designated SP for IP address vmasp6 - Show designated SP for IP6 address

The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Table 10-7 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks.

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

527

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 10-7 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage portmap Show port to SP to MAC mapping. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address. vmasp6 <IP_address> Show designated SP for IP6 address.

/maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately 23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing the dump region, see page 529. To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp

The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If there is a dump available, the system prompts as follows:
>> Maintenance# uu Enter region to dump [main/bkp]: main Dumping main region: Use 'ptdmp' to extract panic dumps. Confirm proceed with large dump (15000 lines) [y/n]: 528 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

If the dump region is empty, the following message appears:
No FLASH dump available.

/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP or FTP server. NOTE – If the TFTP or FTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP or FTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [-mgmt|-data]

Where server is the TFTP or FTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

529

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/lsdmp
Use the /maint/lsdmp command to view dump statistics. For example:
>> Maintenance# lsdmp The main dump was saved at 8:12:58 Fri Jun 3, 2005. A backup dump was saved at 14:47:31 Mon Jun 20, 2005.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

530

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/tsdmp
Use the /maint/tsdmp command to dump all dump information that can be used for technical support. For example:
>> Maintenance# tsdmp Confirm dumping all information, statistics, and configuration [y/n]:

/maint/pttsdmp
Use the /maint/pttsdmp command to upload a technical support dump using an FTP or TFTP connection. The dump was performed earlier using the /maint/tsdmp command. For example:
>> Maintenance# ? pttsdmp Usage: pttsdmp <hostname> <filename> <-tftp|username password> [mgmt|-data] >> Maintenance# pttsdmp Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: 0.0.0.0 Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: dump.txt Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: username Enter password for username on FTP server: Connecting to 0.0.0.0... . .

/maint/sslrst
Use the maint/sslrst command to reset the switch SSL card.

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

531

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

532

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
320506-A, January 2006

CHAPTER 11

The SSL Processor Menu
The SSL Menu is used to connect to the SSL processor. NOTE – To use the SSL Processor Menu, you must be logged in to the processor as the administrator.

Login to the SSL processor
Log into the SSL Processor as described in the following paragraphs. Go to the main menu and enter the SSL processor level.
# cd / -----------------------------------------------------------[Main Menu] info - Information Menu stats - Statistics Menu cfg - Configuration Menu oper - Operations Command Menu boot - Boot Options Menu maint - Maintenance Menu ssl - SSL Accelerator Menu diff - Show pending config changes [global command] apply - Apply pending config changes [global command] save - Save updated config to FLASH [global command] revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command] exit - Exit [global command, always available] >> Main# ssl

533
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Enter the appropriate account information to logon to the processor.
>> Main# ssl Connected to SSL Processor. Type "exit" to quit. login: admin Password: Alteon iSD SSL Hardware platform: 2424S Software version: 5.0.0.34 -----------------------------------------------------------[Main Menu] info - Information menu stats - Statistics menu cfg - Configuration menu boot - Boot menu maint - Maintenance menu diff - Show pending config changes [global command] apply - Apply pending config changes [global command] revert - Revert pending config changes [global command] paste - Restore saved config with key [global command] help - Show command help [global command] exit - Exit [global command, always available] SSL >> Main#

NOTE – Help information on specific commands uses the command “help”, and not the “?” symbol used at other directory levels. The command must also be spelled-out in full. For example, to request help on the “apply” command enter: SSL >> Main# help diff Show any pending configuration changes.

534

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl SSL Processor Menu
[Main Menu] info stats cfg boot maint diff apply revert paste help exit Information menu Statistics menu Configuration menu Boot menu Maintenance menu Show pending config changes Apply pending config changes Revert pending config changes Restore saved config with key Show command help Exit [global command, always

[global command] [global command] [global command] [global command] [global command] available]

Table 11-1 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage info Go to the Information level of the SSL Processor menu. For details, see page 536. stats Go to the Statistics level of the SSL Processor menu. For details, see page 540. cfg Go to the Configuration level of the SSL Processor menu. For details, see page 545. boot Go to the Boot level of the SSL Processor menu. For details, see page 649. maint Go to the Maintenance level of the SSL Processor menu. For details, see page 652. diff Shows any pending configuration changes. For example: SSL >> Main# diff Configuration/ Certificate menu: new child "1" created apply Applies pending configuration changes. revert Remove pending configuration changes. Use this command to undo configuration parameters set since last apply command. For example:

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

535

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-1 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage paste Lets you restore a saved configuration that includes private keys. Before pasting the configuration, you need to provide the password phrase you specified when selecting to include the private keys in the configuration dump. help Displays a summary of the global commands. exit Leave the SSL Processor menu.

/ssl/info SSL Performance information menu
[Information Menu] servers certs hsm sslvpn users ipsec ippool ip sys licenses access kick isdlist local ethernet ports events Show configured SSL servers Show configured certificates Show local HSM information Show configured VPNs Show logged in SSL VPN portal users Show logged in IPSEC users Show ip pool allocations Find information about an IP address Show system configuration Show SSL VPN portal license usage Print the access rules of an SSL VPN portal user Kick an SSL VPN portal user Show all iSDs and their operational status Show local iSD information Show local ethernet status information Show local port(s) information Inspect Events menu

536

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage servers Displays the current SSL server settings, including SSL specific settings for each configured virtual SSL server. certs Displays the certificate name, serial number, expiration date, and key size for each installed certificate. Information related to the subject of the certificate is also displayed. For example: Certificate 1: Certificate name = No certificate information. Validate: key or certificate not defined. No key has been defined. No key has been defined. Revocation: Automatic CRL: URL to retrieve CRL from = LDAP DN used for bind/authentication = Password to use when to authenticate = Refresh interval = 1d List of accepted signers of CRLs = Enable automatic retrieval = disabled hsm Displays information related to the HSM card(s) on the iSD310-SSL FIPS device to which you are currently connected. Information about the current security mode (Extended Security mode or FIPS mode) in the iSD310-SSL FIPS cluster is displayed, as well as user login information (SO or USER) for each HSM card on the iSD310-SSL FIPS device. HSM information is only displayed when you are using the iSD310-SSL FIPS model. sslvpn Show the configured VPNs. users Shows all logged in VPN portal users. For example: Number of currently logged in users: 0 VPN Id User Login ------ ---- ----Source IP Access Group:Profile...Variables... -------------- ----------------

ipsec [<vpnid> [<prefix>]] Show number of IPSEC users logged-in. For example: Number of active ipsec sessions for all VPNs: 0 ippool [<vpnid>] Displays the IP pool allocations.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

537

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP_address> Display information about a specific IP address. For example: SSL >> Information# ip Enter IP to search for: 0.0.0.0 IP 0.0.0.0 not allocated from IP pool sys Shows the system configuration. For example (in part): System: Management IP (MIP) address = 10.10.10.72 iSD Host 1: Type of the iSD = master IP address = 10.10.10.71 License = IPSEC user sessions: 10 TPS: 300 SSL user sessions: 10 Default gateway address = 10.10.10.69 Ports = 1 Hardware platform = 2424S Host Routes: No items configured Host Interface 1: IP address = 10.10.10.71 Network mask = 255.255.255.0 Default gateway address = 0.0.0.0 VLAN tag id = 0 Mode = failover Host Interface Routes: No items configured Interface Ports: 1 . . . licenses [<vpn_ID>] Show the SSL VPN port licenses. For example: Global License Pools VPN Used Size -----------------------------------------------------SSL 0 10 IPSEC 0 10 access <vpnid> <username> Display the access rules for an SSL Portal user. kick <vpnid> <username> Kick an SSL VPN user.

538

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage isdlist Displays the IP addresses, master/slave assignments, CPU usage, memory usage, and operational status for all the iSDs in the cluster. An asterisk (*) in the MIP column indicates which iSD in the cluster is currently is control of the Management IP. An asterisk (*) in the Local column indicates the particular iSD to which you have connected. For example: SSL >> Information# isdlist IP addr type MIP Local cpu(%) mem(%) 10.10.10.71 master * * 2 52 op up

local Displays the current software version, iSD hardware platform, up time (since last boot), IP address, and Ethernet MAC address for the particular iSD host to which you have connected. If you have connected to the MIP address, the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. For example: SSL >> Information# local Alteon iSD SSL Hardware platform: 2424S Software version: 5.0.0.34 Up time: 11 days 1 hour 52 minutes IP address: 10.10.10.71 MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:bc:6f ethernet Displays statistics for the Ethernet network interface card (NIC) on the particular iSD host to which you have connected. If you have connected to the MIP address, the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. If more than one network is configured in the cluster, ethernet statistics for the respective network is displayed. RX packets: the total number of received packets TX packets: the total number of transmitted packets errors: packets lost due to error dropped: error due to lack of resources overruns: error due to lack of resources frame: error due to malformed packets carrier: error due to lack of carrier collisions: number of packet collisions Note: A non-zero collision value may indicate an incorrect configuration of the Ethernet autonegotiation. For example: I/f 1: RX packets:3438 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 I/f 1: TX packets:2738 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 I/f 1: RX bytes:220060 (214.9 Kb) TX bytes:205486 (200.6 Kb)

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

539

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-2 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage ports Displays the status of the local Ethernet interface (NIC) ports on the particular iSD host to which you have connected. If you have connected to the MIP address, the information displayed relates to the iSD host in the cluster that currently is in control of the MIP. For each port, link status (up/down) and Ethernet autonegotiation setting (on/off) is shown. If the link is up, current values for speed (10/100/1000) and duplex mode (half/full) are also shown. If the link is down and autonegotiation is set to off, the configured values for speed and duplex mode are shown instead. For example: SSL >> Information# ports Port 1: link = up, autoneg = on, speed = 1000, mode = full events Go to the Inspect events menu. For details, see page 540.

/ssl/info/events
SSL Performance Menu
[Events Menu] alarms - List all pending alarms download - Dump the event log file to a TFTP/FTP/SFTP server

Table 11-3 SSL Performance Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage alarms Displays all alarms in the active alarm list by their main attributes: severity level, alarm ID number, date and time when triggered, alarm name, sender, and cause. download <protocol> <IP_address | hostname> <filename> Transmits the event log file from the iSD cluster to a file on a TFTP server. Specify the IP address or host name of the TFTP server, as well as a file name.

540

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/stats SSL Performance Statistics menu
[Statistics Menu] sslstats ipsec aaa dump SSL stats IPSEC stats AAA specific statistics Dump all information

Table 11-4 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage sslstats Go to the SSL statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 542. ipsec Go to the IPSEC statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 545. aaa Go to the AAA specific statistics. To view menu options, see page 548. dump Displays cluster-wide SSL statistics for each virtual SSL server in the cluster, as well as the number of active request sessions, and the total number of completed request sessions. The total number of initiated SSL client connections, and the total number of established SSL client connections as accumulated values for all virtual SSL servers in the cluster are also displayed. Histograms, however, are not included in the output

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

541

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/stats/sslstats
SSL Performance Menu
[SSL stats Menu] vpn - Cluster SSL VPN statistics server - Cluster SSL Server statistics local - Local statistics for each isdhost clear - Clear all statistics for all IPs activesess - Number of currently active request sessions totalsess - Total completed request sessions sslaccept - Total completed SSL accept sslconnect - Total completed SSL connect tpshisto - Cluster-wide TPS histograms for all servers clihisto - cluster wide client data histograms for all servers srvhisto - cluster wide server data histograms for all servers

Table 11-5 SSL Performance Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Displays the cluster-wide statistics for SSL VPN. server <srever_number> Displays the cluster-wide statistics for SSL servers. local Go to the Local SSL Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 543. clear Erase all statistics for all IPs. activesess Display the number of currently active requests. For example: active_sessions : 0 totalsess Display the total number of completed request sessions. sslaccept Display the total number of completed SSL request sessions. sslconnect Display the total number of successful SSL connections. tpshisto Display the total number of cluster-wide TPS histograms for all servers. clihisto Display the total number of cluster-wide client data histograms for all servers.

542

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-5 SSL Performance Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage srvhisto Display the total number of cluster-wide server data histograms for all servers.

/ssl/stats/sslstats/local
SSL Performance SSL Local Statistics Menu
[Local SSL isdhost overview tpshisto clihisto srvhisto license dump Statistics Menu] - ISD local SSL server statistics menu - Overview of isdhost local statistics - ISD local TPS histograms for all servers/ISDs - ISD local client byte/s histos for all servers/ISDs - ISD local server data byte/s histos for all servers/ISDs - ISD local license statistics - Dump all information

Table 11-6 SSL Perfomance: SSL Local Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage isdhost <host_number> Go to the ISD local SSL Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 544. overview Display the overall of the isdhost local statistics. tpshisto Display ISD local TPS histograms for all servers/ISDs. clihisto Display ISD local client data histograms for all servers and ISDs. srvhisto Display ISD local server data histograms for all servers and ISDs. license Display local ISD license statistics. For example: **** License stats at ISD number '1' License Limit reached times tps {ok,0} dump Display all local statistical information. ****

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

543

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/stats/sslstats/local/isdhost
SSL Performance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu
[Single ISD SSL Stats 1 Menu] server - ISD local SSL server stats tpshisto - ISD local TPS histograms for all servers clihisto - ISD local client byte/s histograms for all servers srvhisto - ISD local server byte/s histograms for all servers dump - Dump all information

Table 11-7 SSL Perfomance: Single ISD SSL Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage server Displays statistics for the local ISD SSL server. tpshisto Displays ISD local TPS histograms for all servers. clihisto Displays ISD local client data histograms for all servers. srvhosto Displays ISD local server histograms for all servers. dump Displays all statistical information.

544

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/stats/ipsec IPSEC Statistics menu
[IPSEC stats Menu] vpn - Cluster IPSEC Server statistics local - Local statistics for each isdhost clear - Clear all ipsec statistics for all IPs activesess - Number of currently active ipsec sessions totalsess - Total completed ipsec sessions failedsess - Total failed ipsec sessions enctot - Total encoded kBytes enc - Encoded kB/sec last minute dectot - Total decoded kBytes dec - Decoded kB/sec last minute sesshisto - Cluster-wide ipsec session histograms for all servers enchisto - Cluster-wide ipsec encrypt histograms for all servers dechisto - Cluster-wide ipsec decrypt histograms for all servers

Table 11-8 IPSEC Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Displays cluster IPSEC server statistics. local Go to the local statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 546. clear Clear all IPSEC statistics. activesess Display the number of currently active IPSEC sessions. totalsess Display the number of completed IPSEC sessions. failedsess Display the number of failed IPSEC sessions. enctot Display the total number of encoded kBytes. enc Display the total number of encoded kBytes in the last 60 seconds. dectot Display the total number of decoded kBytes. dec Display the total number of decoded kBytes in the last 60 seconds.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

545

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-8 IPSEC Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage sesshisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec session histograms for all servers. enchisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec encrypt histograms for all servers. dechisto Display the Cluster-wide ipsec decrypt histograms for all servers.

/ssl/stats/ipsec/local
SSL Performance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu
[Local IPSEC isdhost sesshisto enchisto dechisto dump Statistics Menu] - ISD local IPSEC server - ISD local ipsec session - ISD local ipsec encrypt - ISD local ipsec decrypt - Dump all information statistics histograms histograms histograms menu for all VPNs/ISDs for all VPNs/ISDs for all VPNs/ISDs

Table 11-9 SSL Perfomance: Local IPSEC Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage isdhost Go to the ISD Local IPSEC server statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 547. sesshisto Displays the local IPSEC session histograms for all VPNs and ISDs. enchisto Displays the local IPSEC encryption histograms for all VPNs and ISDs. dechisto Displays the local IPSEC decryption histograms for all VPNs and ISDs. dump Display all IPSEC statistical information.

546

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/stats/ipsec/local/isdhost
SSL Performance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu
[Single ISD IPSEC Stats 1 Menu] vpn - ISD local IPSEC server stats activesess - Locally active ipsec sessions all VPNs totalsess - Locally total ipsec sessions all VPNs failedsess - Locally failed ipsec sessions, all VPNs enctot - Locally total ipsec encoded kBytes all VPNs enc - Locally ipsec encoded kB/sec last minute all VPNs dectot - Locally total ipsec decoded kBytes all VPNs dec - Locally ipsec decoded kB/sec last minute all VPNs sesshisto - ISD local ipsec sess histograms for all VPNs enchisto - ISD local ipsec encrypt histograms for all VPNs dechisto - ISD local ipsec decrypt histograms for all VPNs dump - Dump all information

Table 11-10 SSL Perfomance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vpn <VPN_number> Display the ISD local IPSEC server statistics. activesess Display the locally active IPSEC sessions for all VPNs. totalsess Display the total of locally active IPSEC sessions for all VPNs. failedsess Display the failed IPSEC sessions for all VPNs. enctot Display the total kBytes encoded for all VPNs. enc Display the locally encoded kBytes for all VPNs. dectot Display the total kBytes decoded for all VPNs. dec Display the locally decoded kBytes for all VPNs. sesshisto Display the ISD local IPSEC session histograms for all VPNs. enchisto Display the ISD local IPSEC encrypted histograms for all VPNs.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

547

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-10 SSL Perfomance: Single IPSEC ISD Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage dechisto Display the ISD local ipsec decrypt histograms for all VPNs. dump Display all ISD statistics.

/ssl/stats/aaa
AAA Statistics Menu
[AAA Statistics Menu] total - Cluster-wide authentication statistics (per VPN) isdhost - ISD local authentication statistics (per VPN) dump - Dump all information

Table 11-11 AAA Statistics Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage total <VPN_ID> Display the Cluster-wide authentication statistics for each VPN. isdhost </cfg/sys/host number> Display the ISD local authentication statistics for each VPN. dump Display all AA statistics.

/ssl/cfg
SSL Performance Configuration Menu
[Configuration Menu] ssl - SSL offload menu cert - Certificate menu vpn - VPN menu test - Create test vpn, portal and certificate quick - Quick vpn setup wizard sys - System-wide parameter menu lang - Language support ptcfg - Backup configuration to TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP server gtcfg - Restore configuration from TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP server dump - Dump configuration on screen for copy-and-paste

548

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-12 SSL Perfomance Configuration Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ssl Go to the SSL offload menu. To view menu options, see page 551. cert Go to the Certificate menu. To view menu options, see page 554. vpn Go to the VPN menu. To view menu options, see page 573. test Create a test VPN, portal and certificate. For example: SSL >> Configuration# test Enter virtual IP address of test portal: 0.0.0.0 VPN user name: Test_vpn VPN password: smith Do you want to configure IPsec? (yes/no) [no]: n Do you want to configure Netdirect? (yes/no) [no]: n Creating VPN 1 Creating Linkset 1 Name: base-links Creating Authentication 1 Calling /cfg/vpn 1/aaa/auth 1/local/add Test_vpn smith test Creating Group 1 Name: test Creating Access rule 1 Added base-links to linkset Created /cfg/cert 2 Use 'apply' to activate. quick Create a VPN configuration using command prompts. sys Go to the System-wide parameter menu. To view menu options, see page 649. lang Go to the Language Support menu. To view menu options, see page 649.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

549

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-12 SSL Perfomance Configuration Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ptcfg Saves the current configuration, including private keys and certificates, to a TFTP server. The configuration can later be restored by using the gtcfg command. You are required to specify a password phrase before the information is sent to the TFTP server. If you restore the configuration by using the gtcfg command, you will be prompted for the password phrase you have specified. The password phrase is used to protect the private keys in the configuration.

NOTE – Note 1: If you have fully separated the Administrator user role from the Certificate Administrator user role, the export passphrase defined by the certificate administrator is used to protect the private keys in the configuration - transparently to the user. When a configuration backup is restored by using the gtcfg command, the certificate administrator must enter the correct passphrase.

NOTE – Note 2: When using the ptcfg command on an iSD310-SSL FIPS, private keys are encrypted using the wrap key that was generated when the first HSM card in the cluster was initialized.
gtcfg Restores a configuration, including private keys and certificates, from a TFTP server. You need to provide the password phrase you specified when saving the configuration to the TFTP server.

NOTE – Note: If you have fully separated the Administrator user role from the Certificate Administrator user role (by removing the admin user from the certadmin group), the certificate administrator must enter the passphrase that was defined by him or her using the /cfg/sys/user/caphrase command.
dump Display the configuration on-screen for a copy and paste operation.

550

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl
SSL Configuration Server Menu
[SSL Menu] server test quick - SSL server menu - Create test server and certificate - Quick server setup wizard

Table 11-13 SSL Configuration Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage server Go to the SSl Server menu. To view menu options, see page 552. test Create a test VPN, portal and certificate. For example: SSL >> Configuration# test Enter virtual IP address of test portal: 0.0.0.0 VPN user name: Test_vpn VPN password: smith Do you want to configure IPsec? (yes/no) [no]: n Do you want to configure Netdirect? (yes/no) [no]: n Creating VPN 1 Creating Linkset 1 Name: base-links Creating Authentication 1 Calling /cfg/vpn 1/aaa/auth 1/local/add Test_vpn smith test Creating Group 1 Name: test Creating Access rule 1 Added base-links to linkset Created /cfg/cert 2 Use 'apply' to activate. quick Create a VPN configuration using command prompts.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

551

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server
SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu
[Server 1 Menu] name vips standalone port rip rport type proxy trace ssl tcp adv del ena dis Set server name Set IP addr(s) of server Set standalone mode Set listen port of server Set real server IP addr Set real server port Set type (generic/http/socks) Set transparent proxy mode (on/off) Traffic trace menu SSL settings menu TCP endpoint settings menu Advanced settings menu Remove virtual server Enable virtual server Disable virtual server

Table 11-14 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Enter the name of the server. vips <IP_address> Enter the virtual IP address for the server. standalone on|off Set the standalone mode. port <integer> Set the listen port for the server. rip <IP_address> Set the actual server IP address. rport <integer> Set the actual server port number. type <generic/http/socks> Set the port type. proxy on|off Set the proxy mode. trace Go to the Trace menu.To view menu options, see page 554.

552

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-14 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ssl Go to the SSL Settings menu. To view menu options, see page 555. tcp Go to the TCP endpoints menu. To view menu options, see page 556. adv Go to the Advanced settings menu. To view menu options, see page 557. del Remove the virtual server. ena enabled|disabled Enable the virtual server. dis enabled|diabled Disable the virtual server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

553

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/trace
SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu
[Trace Menu] ssldump tcpdump ping dnslookup traceroute Create traffic dump Create traffic dump Ping through backend interface Lookup a name in DNS through backend interface traceroute through backend interface

Table 11-15 SSL Configuration Server-specific Trace Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ssldump Create a traffic dump. Information on creating dump patterns can be found at http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html. tcpdump Create a traffic dump. Information on creating dump patterns can be found at http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html. ping <hostname> Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. dnslookup <hostname> Lookup a hostname in DNS. traceroute <hostname> Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network.

554

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/ssl
SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu
[SSL Settings Menu] cert - Set server certificate cachesize - Set SSL cache size cachettl - Set SSL cache timeout cacerts - Set list of accepted signers of client certificates cachain - Set list of CA chain certificates protocol - Set protocol version verify - Set certificate verification level ciphers - Set cipher list ena - Enable SSL dis - Disable SSL

Table 11-16 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cert unset|set Create a server certificate. cachesize <integer> Set the SSL cache size. cachettl <integer> Set the SSL cache timeout (in seconds). cacerts <integerlist> Set the list of authorized signers of client certificates. Separate the signer list using commas. cachain <integerlist> Set the list of CA chain certificates. Separate the list using commas. protocol <issl2/ssl3/ssl23/tls1> Set the protocol version. verify none|optional|require Set the verification level of the certificate. ciphers Set the cipher list. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. SSLv3:TLSv1). Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.g. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, - or +. ! permanently deletes the ciphers from the list (e.g. !RSA). - deletes the ciphers from the list, but the ciphers can be added again by later options. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

555

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-16 SSL Configuration Server-specific SSL Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena yes|no Enable SSL. dis yes|no Disable SSL.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/tcp
SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu
[TCP Settings Menu] cwrite - Set ckeep - Set swrite - Set sconnect - Set csendbuf - Set crecbuf - Set ssendbuf - Set srecbuf - Set client client server server client client server server TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP write timeout keep alive timeout write timeout connect timeout send buffer size receive buffer size send buffer size receive buffer size

Table 11-17 SSL Configuration Server-specific TCP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cwrite <integer> Set the client TCP write timeout (in seconds, 1-2147483647). ckeep <integer> Set the client TCP keep alive timeout (in seconds, 1-2147483647). swrite <integer> Set the server TCP write timeout (in seconds, 1-2147483647). sconnect <integer> Set the server TCP connect timeout (in seconds, 1-2147483647). csendbuf auto|<2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP send buffer size (in bytes). crecbuf auto|<2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP receive buffer size (in bytes). ssendbuf <generic/http/socks> Set the server TCP send buffer size (in bytes). srecbuf on|off Set the server TCP receive buffer size (in bytes).

556

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv
SSL Configuration Server-specific Advanced Menu
[Advanced Settings string blockstrin loadbalanc sslconnect Menu] String menu Set strings to block Load balancing menu SSL connect menu

Table 11-18 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage string Go to the String menu. To view the menu options, see page 558. blockstrin <string> Set the strings to block, separated by commas. loadbalanc Go to the Load Balancing menu. To view the menu options, see page 559. sslconnect Go to the SSL Connect menu. To view the menu options, see page 560.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

557

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/string
SSL Configuration Server Advanced String Menu
[LB String 1 Menu] match location icase negate del Set string to match Set locations to perform the match in Set ignore case in to match Set negate the result of the match Remove string

Table 11-19 SSL Configuration Server-specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage match <string>|* Enter the string to match. For example: SSL >> LB String 1# match Current value: <not set> Enter match string (may contain *): location <locationlist> Set the match string locations, separated by commas. Possible values are: Macros url, unknown, other, header Methods options, get, head, post, put, delete, trace, connect Special query, params, cookie-override Headers accept, accept-charset, accept-encoding, accept-language, accept-ranges, age, allow, authorization, cache-control, connection, content-base, content-encoding, content-language, content-length, content-location, content-md5, content-range, content-type, cookie, cookie2, date, etag, expires, from, host, if-match, if-modified-since, if-none-match, if-range, if-unmodified-since, keep-alive, last-modified, location, max-forwards, pragma, proxy-authenticate, proxy-authorization, proxyconnection, public, range, referer, retry-after, server, set-cookie, transfer-encoding, upgrade, useragent, vary, via, warning, www-authenticate, x-forwarded-for, x-ssl icase on|off Set the string match as case respective yes (on) or no (off). negate on|off Set a negative match scheme. The current strings are excluded (on) or included (off). del string<string_number> Delete the string.

558

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu
[Load Balancing Settings Menu] type - Set load balancing type persistenc - Set persistence strategy cookie - Cookie settings menu metric - Set load balancing metric health - Set health check type script - Health check script menu interval - Set health check interval (s) remotessl - Remote SSL connect menu backend - Backend servers menu ena - Enable load balancing dis - Disable load balancing

Table 11-20 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage type all|<string> Set the load balancing type. persistenc none|cookie|session Set the persistence strategy. cookie Go to the Cookie settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 560. Note that this menu is accessible only when persistenc is set to “cookie”. metric hash|roundrobin|leastconn Set the load balancing metric. health none|tcp|ssl|auto|script Set the health check type. script Go to the heath check script menu. To view the menu options, see page 562. interval <integer> Set the health check interval. remotessl Go to the Remote SSL connection menu. To view the menu options, see page 563. backend Go to the Backend Servers menu. To view the menu options, see page 565.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

559

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-20 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable load balancing. dis enable|disable Disable load balancing.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ cookie
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu
[Cookie Settings mode name domain expires expiresdel localvips offset length Menu] - Set cookie mode - Set cookie name - Set cookie domain - Set cookie expires - Set cookie expires delta - Configure other local VIPs - Set cookie value offset - Set cookie value length

Table 11-21 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage mode insert | passive | rewrite Sets the cookie load balancing mode. name <cookie_name> Sets the cookie name. domain <domain_name> Sets the cookie domain name. expires <date_time> Sets the cookie expiration date and time. expiresdel <0(session)-2147483647> Sets the cookie expiration delta value. localvips Opens the Local VIPs menu. For more information on this menu refer to page 562.

560

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-21 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Cookie Menu Options (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage offset <1-64> Sets the cookie value offset. length <0-64> Sets the cookie length

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

561

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ cookie/localvips
Local VIP Configuration Menu
[Local VIPs Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-22 Local VIP Configuration Menu
Command Syntax and Usage list Lists all configured values. del <entry_index> Deletes the entry indicated by the index value. add <ip_address> Adds an entry by IP address. insert <entry_index, ip_address> Adds an entry at a specific point by index and IP address. move <source_index, destination_index> Moves an entry from the source index to the destination index.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ script
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu
[Health Check Script Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

562

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-23 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Health Script Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list Display all values. del <index> Delete a specific value. add <command> <timeout> <argument> Add a new health script. insert <position> <command> <timeout> <argument> Insert a new value. move <value> <value> Exchange one value for another.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ remotessl
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu
[Remote SSL Connect Settings Menu] protocol - Set protocol version cert - Set client certificate ciphers - Set accepted ciphers for ssl connect verify - Verify server menu

Table 11-24 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage protocol aissl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the protocol version. cert <integer, 1 to 1500> Set the certificate number.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

563

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-24 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ciphers <string> Set the accepted ciphers for SSL connection. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. SSLv3:TLSv1). Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.g. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, - or +. ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.g. !RSA). - deletes the ciphers from the list, but the ciphers can be added again by later options. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length verify Go to the Verify Server menu. To view the menu options, see page 564.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ remotessl/verify
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu
[Remote SSL Connect Verify Settings Menu] verify - Set certificate verification level commonname - Set server common name cacerts - Set list of accepted signers of server's certificate

Table 11-25 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage verify none|require Set the ertification verification level. commonname <name> Set the server common name. For example: SSL >> Remote SSL Connect Verify Settings# commonname Current value: [old_server_name] Give common name of server: <new_server_name>

564

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-25 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Remote SSL Verification Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <integer_list> Enter the certificate numbers, separated by commas.

/ssl/cfg/ssl/server/adv/loadbalanc/ backend
SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu
[Backend Server 1 Menu] ip - Set IP addr of backend server port - Set backend server port sslconnect - Set perform SSL connect if enabled for server remote - Set server is remote rname - Set host name of remote server remotessl - Set remote site is ssl lbstrings - Set load balancing strings lbop - Set string load balancing operation del - Remove backend server ena - Enable backend server dis - Disable backend server

Table 11-26 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP_address> Set theIP address of the backend server. port <port_number> Set the backend server port number. sslconnect on|off Set the SSL connection option. remote true|false Set the server as remote, as required. rname <hostname> Set hostname of the remote server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

565

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-26 SSL Configuration Server Advanced Load Balancing Backend Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage remotessl true|false Set the remote site as SSL. lbstrings <integers> Set the load balance strings, separated by a comma. lbop any|all|one|none Set the string load balancing operation. del Remove the backend server. ena enable|disable Enable the backend server. dis enable|disable Disable the backend server.

/ssl/cfg/cert
SSL Configuration Certificate Menu
[Certificate 1 Menu] name - Set certificate name cert - Set certificate key - Set private key revoke - Revocation menu genkey - Generate private key gensigned - Generate signed client/server certificate request - Generate certificate request sign - Sign a certificate request test - Generate test certificate and key import - Import key and certificate with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP export - Export certificate and key with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP display - Display certificate and key show - Show certificate information info - Show certificate short information subject - Show certificate subject information validate - Check if key and certificate match keysize - Show key size keyinfo - Show how key is stored del - Remove certificate

566

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Enter the name of the certificate. cert <pasted_certificate_content> Paste the content of a copied certificate. For example: Paste the certificate, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. > key <pasted_key_content> Paste the copied key. For example: Paste the key, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. > revoke Go to the Revoke menu. To view the menu options, see page 571. genkey 512|1024|2048|4096 Generate a private key. gensigned <key> <certificate_number> Generate a certificate.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

567

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage request Generate a certicate request. SSL >> Certificate 1# request The combined length of the following parameters may not exceed 225 bytes. Country Name (2 letter code): CA State or Province Name (full name): Ontario Locality Name (eg, city): Ottawa Organization Name (eg, company): NoTel Organizational Unit Name (eg, section): MaintCommon Name (eg, your name or your server's hostname): NoTel-12 Email Address: maint@notel.ca Key size (512/1024/2048/4096) [1024]: 1024 Request a CA certificate (y/n) [n]: y Specify challenge password (y/n) [n]: n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----MIIBvjCCAScCAQAwfjELMAkGA1UEBhMCQ0ExCzAJBgNVBAgTAk9OMRAwDgYDVQQH EwdPdHRhd2VhMQ4wDAYDVQQKEwVOb1RlbDEOMAwGA1UECxMFTWFpbnQxETAPBgNV BAMTCE5vVGVsLTEyMR0wGwYJKoZIhvcNAQkBFg5tYWludEBub3RlbC5jYTCBnzAN BgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA2LJNQnjDxHXm1bunZF39o/1CJ7egEupd gXaIiDt1xQ5kWNlCcIhXrsksrpAOss/NMy2DNLmNd/31BO8XSvuZWs6LJxznZyBC 6WcSmOa6r96CnsvPPi/jIqAZQMbklwclH5Qa/JjSWuaoVdlVOAuhe58PqyQketXm 58w8n+Iy+a0CAwEAAaAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAA4GBAMMhwai0XLkL+YT3qBBo tmtTL7DgH/7czR97lgXsDawZOWaiYq4tAEBSr+Ap1qxAqgS4VJxrjBZIYT6xQW6z MvHE20s+Reaf9cX9OePTvaSH9SUSKz8QNhPLUdBo7LOURUaF7aN5IWPBezGQwgjp Rxxf+chfXa7M8i7VdY9YyAHA -----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST----Use 'apply' to store the private key in the iSD until the signed certificate is entered. The private key will be lost unless you 'apply' or save it elsewhere using 'export'. sign <key> <certificate_number> Sign a certificate.

568

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage test Create a test certificate and key. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# test The combined length of the following parameters may not exceed 225 bytes. Country Name (2 letter code): CA State or Province Name (full name): Ontario Locality Name (eg, city): Ottawa Organization Name (eg, company): NoTel Organizational Unit Name (eg, section): Maint Common Name (eg, your name or your server's hostname): NoTel-12 Email Address: maint@notel.ca Valid for days [365]: 200 Valid for days [365]: 200 Key size (512/1024/2048/4096) [1024]: 1024 Test key and certificate added. Use 'apply' to activate. import <proto> <server> <certfile> Import a remote certificate and key. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# import Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: NoTel-10 Enter filename on server: key_certificate2389 Retrieving key_certificate2389 from NoTel-10 Error: Host not found, FTP server not found, or connection rejected. export <proto> <server> <certfile> Export a key and certificate to a remote host. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# export Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: NoTel-10 Enter export format (pem/der/net/pkcs12): pem Enter export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Reconfirm export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Enter name of combined key and certificate file on remote host: key_cert_from_NoTel-12 Error: Host not found, FTP server not found, or connection rejected.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

569

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage display Display a certificate and key. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# display Encrypt private key (yes/no) [yes]: yes Enter export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Reconfirm export pass phrase: <hidden_text> Proc-Type: 4,ENCRYPTED DEK-Info: DES-EDE3-CBC,8E1E1EB54398437B 1NngBGmeIGxhndoR3+F4DNmYNCtH6tbVMZmmTCAu0ee9Ss9vjy6N3jXgMUy8RnfV 1dRLixDPlpAB5CwsSUBLROtvq6rhyZnwKbofz4UBon1tE33eX86uNrXGjdvPkfzD x8TrCXdcewY0W1xuPA6mnb0mHCn768fqoNd5YlXPMRbPrK/nTfvCHlfvVmHkzpw3 BrvNfqVpdijQkdv+X53gn7DbYBsFYKSLsjyZ1Dst1JFDS5W594by1P7WseRYi4Lq XPcmgZA7BtC5JV9d6Fwmd66Cois3WUxBtTeLJDFet6fr/9e3nXfa+pPyIgGGWAYE . . . A9xlBRMYzppbzQVjjFK0maFRtuhIiEbexLJwTCEwfyVMk8juHvBWIQ== -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIID3jCCA0egAwIBAgIBADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFADCBgjELMAkGA1UEBhMCQ0Ex EDAOBgNVBAgTB09udGFyaW8xDzANBgNVBAcTBk90dGF3YTEOMAwGA1UEChMFTm9U . . show Show certificate information. info Show short-form certificate information. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# info Serial number: 0 (0x0) Expire: Jan 19 14:49:18 2006 GMT Certificate subject: C=CA ST=Ontario L=Ottawa O=NoTel OU=Maint CN=NoTel-12/emailAddress=maint@notel.ca

570

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-27 SSL Configuration Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage subject Show certificate subject information. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# subject Certificate subject: C/countryName (2.5.4.6) ST/stateOrProvinceName (2.5.4.8) L/localityName (2.5.4.7) O/organizationName (2.5.4.10) OU/organizationalUnitName (2.5.4.11) CN/commonName (2.5.4.3) emailAddress/emailAddress (1.2.840.113549.1.9.1) validate <matched_key> <matched_certificate> Check if certificate and key are matched. keysize Display key size (in bytes). keyinfo Displays how the key is stored. del Delete the certificate and key. For example: SSL >> Certificate 1# del Certificate 1 will be deleted when changes are applied.

= = = = = = =

CA Ontario Ottawa NoTel Maint NoTel-12 maint@notel.ca

/ssl/cfg/cert/revoke
SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu
[Revocation Menu] add addx del list rev import automatic Add decimal serial number to revocation list Add hex serial number to revocation list Cancel revocation for a serial number List revoked certificates Enter revocation list Import revocation list with TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP Automatic CRL retrieval menu

Table 11-28 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <integer> Add a decimal serial number to the revocation list.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

571

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-28 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage addx <hexidecimal_number> Add a hexidecimal number to the revocation list. del <serial_number> Cancel the revocation of a serial number. list List the revoked certificates. rev Paste a revocation list into another revocation list. import <proto> <server> <file> Import a remote revocation list. automatic Go to the automatic retrieval menu.

/ssl/cfg/cert/revoke/automatic
SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu
[Automatic CRL Menu] url - Set URL to retrieve CRL from authDN - Set LDAP DN used for bind/authentication passwd - Set password to use when to authenticate interval - Set refresh interval cacerts - Set list of accepted signers of CRLs ena - Enable automatic retrieval dis - Disable automatic retrieval

Table 11-29 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage url <URL> Set the URL value to retrieve the CRL. authDN <LDAP-Distinguished-Name> Set the LDAP DN to be used for bind and authentication. passwd <string> Set the authentication password. interval <time> Set the refresh interval.

572

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-29 SSL Configuration Revoke Certificate Automatic Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <certificate_numbers> Create a list of accepted signers of CRLs. Separate the lsit elements by commas ena enabled|disabled Enable automatic retrieval. dis enabled|disabled Disable automatic retrieval.

/ssl/cfg/vpn
SSL VPN Configuration Menu
[VPN 1 Menu] ips standalone aaa server ipsec ippool portal linkset sslclient adv del Set IP addr(s) of the VPN Set standalone mode (no switch) AAA menu SSL server menu IPsec server menu IP address pool menu Portal look and feel menu Portal linkset menu SSL VPN client menu Advanced settings menu Remove VPN

Table 11-30 SSL VPN Configuration Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ips <IP_address> Set the IP address of the VPN. standalone on|off Set the standalone mode. aaa Go to the AAA menu. To view the menu options, see page 573. server Go to the SSL server menu. To view the menu options, see page 578. ipsec Go to the IPsec server menu. To view the menu options, see page 602.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

573

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-30 SSL VPN Configuration Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ippool Go to the IP POOL menu. To view the menu options, see page 615. portal Go to the Portal look and feel menu. To view the menu options, see page 619. linkset Go to the Portal lonkset menu. To view the menu options, see page 621. sslclient Go to the SSL VPN client menu.To view the menu options, see page 625. adv Go to the Advanced Settings menu.To view the menu options, see page 627. del Remove the VPN.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa
SSL VPN Configuration Menu
[AAA Menu] quick tg ttl auth authorder network service appspec filter group defgroup ssodomains ssoheaders radacct AAA setup wizard TunnelGuard menu Set login session TTL Authentication menu Set authentication server fallback order Network access menu Service access menu Application specific menu Client filter menu Group menu Set default group Single-Sign on enabled domains menu Single-Sign on headers menu RADIUS accounting menu

Table 11-31 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage quick <IP_address> AAA setup wizard.

574

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-31 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage tg Go to the TunnelGuard menu. To view the menu options, see page 576. ttl <TTL for idle sessions (max 31d, min 2m)> Set the login session TTL. auth Go to the Authentication menu. To view the menu options, see page 578. authorder <list_of_servers> Set the authetication server fallback order. Use a comma to separate entries. network Go to the Network Access menu. To view the menu options, see page 582. service Go to the Service Access menu. To view the menu options, see page 584. appsec Go to the Application Specific menu. To view the menu options, see page 585. filter Go to the Client Filter menu.To view the menu options, see page 588. group Go to the Group menu.To view the menu options, see page 589. defgroup <name_of_group> Set the default group. ssodomains Go to the Single sign-on enabled domains menu. To view the menu options, see page 597. ssoheaders Go to the Single Sugn-on Headers menu. To view the menu options, see page 597. radacct Go to the Radius Accounting menu. To view the menu options, see page 599.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

575

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/tg
SSL VPN Configuration TunnelGuard Menu
[TG Menu] ena dis quick recheck action retry list loglevel Enable TunnelGuard Disable TunnelGuard Quick TunnelGuard setup wizard Set recheck interval Set fail action Set UDP retry interval List SRS rules Set TunnelGuard applet loglevel

Table 11-32 SSL VPN Configuration AAA TunnelGuard Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable TunnelGuard. dis enable|disable Disable TunnelGuard.

576

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-32 SSL VPN Configuration AAA TunnelGuard Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage quick <TTL for idle sessions (max 31d, min 2m)> Use the Quick TunnelGuard setup wizard. For example: SSL >> TG# quick In the event that the TunnelGuard checks fails on a client, the session can be teardown, or left in restricted mode with limited access. Which action do you want to use for TunnelGuard failure? (teardown/restricted) [restricted]: restricted Do you want to create a tunnelguard test user? (yes/no) [yes]: yes Enabling TunnelGuard Creating Linkset 1 Name: tg_passed This Linkset just prints the TG result Creating Linkset 2 Name: tg_failed This Linkset just prints the TG result Adding test SRS rule srs-rule-test This rule check for the presence of the file C:\tunnelguard\tg.txt Creating Group 1 Name: tunnelguard Creating Extended Profile 1 Giving full access when tg passed Creating Access rule 1 Creating Extended Profile 2 Giving no access when tg failed Using SRS rule: srs-rule-test Creating Authentication 1 Adding user 'tg' with password 'tg' Use 'diff' to view pending changes, and 'apply' to commit recheck <seconds> Set the recheck interval. action teardown|restricted Set the Fail action. retry <seconds, 1-65535> Set the UDP retry interval. list List the SRS rules. loglevel <string> Set the TunnelGuard applet log level.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

577

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth menu level, you are prompted to create an authentication if one does not already exist.
Creating Authentication 1 Select one of radius, ldap, ntlm, siteminder, cert, rsa or local: radius Auth name: Authentication_1 Entering: RADIUS settings menu Entering: RADIUS servers menu IP Address to add: 0.0.0.0 Port (default is 1812): 1812 Enter shared secret: shared Leaving: RADIUS servers menu Enter vendor id [alteon]: alteon Enter vendor type [1]: 1 Leaving: RADIUS settings menu -----------------------------------------------------------[Authentication 1 Menu] type - Set authentication mechanism name - Set auth name display - Set auth display name domain - Set windows domain for backend single sign-on radius - RADIUS settings menu adv - Advanced settings menu del - Remove Authentication

Table 11-33 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage type radius|ldap|ntlm|siteminder|cert|rsa|local Set the authentication scheme. name <string> Set the authentication name. The default is local. display <string> Set the authentication display name. domain <string> Set the current windows domain for backend single sign-on. radius <list_of_servers> Go to the Radius menu. The menu is available only if the type is Radius (# type radius). To view the menu options, see page 579.

578

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-33 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage adv Go to the Advanced menu. To view the menu options, see page 582. del Remove the authentication.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius menu level, the authentication type must be set to radius. For example, /ssl/vpn/aaa/auth/type radius.
[RADIUS Menu] servers vendorid vendortype timeout sessiontim macro RADIUS servers menu Set vendor id for group attribute Set vendor type for group attribute Set RADIUS server timeout Session Timeout menu User-defined Macro menu

Table 11-34 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Radius servers menu. To view the menu options, see page 580. vendorid <string> Set the switch vendor ID. vendortype <vendortype> Set the vendor type. timeout <integer, 1 to 1000 seconds> Set the Radius server timeout. sessiontim Go to the Sessiontim menu. To view the menu options, see page 580. macro Go to the Macro menu. To view the menu options, see page 581.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

579

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/servers
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Servers Menu
[RADIUS Servers Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

Table 11-35 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all values (servers). del <index_number> Delete a server value by name. add <ip> <port, default=1812> <secret> Add a new value (server). insert <position> <ip> <port> <secret> Insert a value into the list. move <value> <value> Move a value position in the list.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/ sessiontm
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu
[SessionTimeout Menu] vendorid - Set vendor id for session timeout attribute vendortype - Set vendor type for session timeout attribute ena - Enable Session-Timeout dis - Disable Session-Timeout

580

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-36 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Session Timeout Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vendorid <vendorid> Set the vendor ID number. vendortype <value> Set the Vendor Type number. ena enable|disable Enable session timeout. dis enable|disable Disable session timeout.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/radius/macro
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Radius Macro Menu
[Macro Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-37 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Radius Macro Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all values. del <value> Delete a value using its number. add <vendorid> <vendortype> <attribute_type (IP, <string> <integer>)> Add a value. insert <index_position> <vendorid> <vendortype> <attribute_type_string> Insert a value. move <value> <value> Move a value’s position in the list.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

581

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/auth/adv
SSL VPN Configuration Authentication Advanced Menu
[Advanced Menu] groupauth - Set Authentication server list of group information secondauth - Set Secondary authentication server

Table 11-38 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Authentication Advamced Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage groupauth <hostnames> Set the list of authentication servers. Separate values using a comma. secondauth <hostname> Set the secondary authentication server.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network
SSL VPN Configuration Network Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network menu level, you are prompted to create a network if one does not already exist.
SSL >> AAA# network Enter network number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Network 1 Network name: Network_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Network 1 Menu] name - Set network name subnet - Subnet menu comment - Set comment del - Remove network

Table 11-39 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the network name. subnet Go to the Subnet menu. To view the menu options, see page 583.

582

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-39 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage comment <text_string> Create a text description (comment) about the network. del Remove the network. The network will be removed when the global /apply command is entered.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/network/subnet
SSL VPN Configuration Network Subnet Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/networksubnet menu level, you are prompted to create a subnet if one does not already exist.
SSL >> Network 1# sub Enter subnet number: (1-1023) 1 Creating Network Subnet 1 Enter host name: Subnet_1 Enter network address: 0.0.0.0 Enter network netmask: netmask -----------------------------------------------------------[Network Subnet 1 Menu] host - Set Host Name net - Set network address mask - Set network mask del - Remove subnet

Table 11-40 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Network Subnet Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage host <hostname> Set the hostname for the subnet. net <IP_address> Set the subnet address. mask <IP_address> Set the Network mask. del Remove the Subnet.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

583

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/service
SSL VPN Configuration Service Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/service menu level, you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.
SSL >> AAA# service Enter service number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Service 1 Service name: Service_1 Enter service protocol (list of tcp,udp): tcp Enter service ports: 1,2,3 -----------------------------------------------------------[Service 1 Menu] name - Set service name protocol - Set allowed protocols ports - Set allowed port comment - Set comment del - Remove Service

Table 11-41 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Service Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <service_name> Set the service name. protocol tcp|udp Set the protocols that are allowed. ports <integers> Set the allowed ports. If nore than one, use commas to separate. comment <string> Create a description (comment) about the service. del Delete the service.

584

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec
SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec menu level, you are prompted to create a network if one does not already exist.
SSL >> AAA# appspec Enter appspec number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating AppSpecific 1 AppSpec name: AppSpec_1 Entering: Paths menu Path format: The paths are formated differently for different applications. For smb you write the path as /<WORKGROUP>/<FILESHARE>/<FILE PATH>, for example /NORTEL/homes/public This will give access to the public directory in the homes share in the NORTEL workgroup/domain. For ftp you write the path as <ABSOLUTE FILE PATH>, for example /home/share/public/ This will give access to the /home/share/public. Note that all paths are absolute from the root. For web servers you write the path <SERVER PATH>, for example /intranet This will give access to the /intranet path on the web server. Enter path: /path Leaving: Paths menu. ---------------------------------------------[AppSpecific 1 Menu] name - Set appspec name paths - Paths menu comment - Set comment del - Remove AppSpec

Table 11-42 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <appsec_name> Create an application name. paths Go to the Paths menu. To view the menu options, see page 571.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

585

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-42 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage comment <string> Create a description (comment) about the Application. del Delete the application.

586

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/appspec/paths
SSL VPN Configuration Application specific Paths Menu
[Paths Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-43 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Paths Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all paths. del <path_value> Delete a path by its number. add Add a new path. For example: SSL >> Paths# list Old: Pending: 1: /info SSL >> Paths# add Path format: The paths are formated differently for different applications. For smb you write the path as /<WORKGROUP>/<FILESHARE>/<FILE PATH>, for example /NORTEL/homes/public This will give access to the public directory in the homes share in the NORTEL workgroup/domain. For ftp you write the path as <ABSOLUTE FILE PATH>, for example /home/share/public/ This will give access to the /home/share/public. Note that all paths are absolute from the root. For web servers you write the path <SERVER PATH>, for example /intranet This will give access to the /intranet path on the web server. Enter path: /home/storage insert <index> Insert a path into the path list.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

587

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-43 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Application specific Paths Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage del Delete the path.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/filter
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/filter menu level, you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.
SSL >> AAA# filter Enter client filter number or name: (1-63) 1 Creating Client Filter 1 Filter name: Filter_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Client Filter 1 Menu] name - Set filter name cert - Client certificate present iewiper - IE cache wiper present tg - TunnelGuard checks passed methods - Set access methods authserver - Set authentication servers clientnet - Set client network reference comment - Set comment del - Remove client filter

Table 11-44 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <filter_name> Set the filter name. cert true|false|ignore Enter teh applicability of a certificate. iewiper true|false|ignore Set the prescence of the IE cache wiper. tg true|false|ignore Set the state of the TunnelGuard checks passed.

588

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-44 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Filter Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage methods ssl|ipsec|netdirect Set the access methods. authserver <hostnames> Set authentication server names. If more than one, separate the names using a comma. clientnet <clientnet_hostname> Set client network reference. comment Create a description (comment) of the filter. del Remove the client filter.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group menu level, you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.
SSL >> AAA# group Enter group number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating Group 1 Group name: Group_1 Enter number of sessions (0 is unlimited): 0 Enter user type (advanced/medium/novice): novice -----------------------------------------------------------[Group 1 Menu] name - Set group name access - Access rule menu print - Print access rules restrict - Set number of login sessions usertype - Set portal user type linkset - Linkset menu extend - Extended profiles menu tgsrs - Set TunnelGuard SRS Rule ipsec - IPsec menu comment - Set comment del - Remove group

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

589

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-45 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set tthe group name. access Go to the Access rule menu. To view the menu options, see page 591. print Display the Access rules. For example: SSL >> Group 1# print Network Ports ----------Proto Path ----- ---Action ------

restrict <integer> Restrict the number of login sessions. The default is 0 (unlimited) usertype advanced|medium|novice Set the user level. linkset Go to the Linkset menu. To view the menu options, see page 592. extend Go to the Extended Profiles menu. To view the menu options, see page 593. tgsrs <string> Set the TunnelGuard SRS rule. ipsec Go to the IPSEC menu.To view the menu options, see page 595. comment Create a decription (comment) of the Group. del Delete the group.

590

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/access
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/access menu level, you are prompted to create a service if one does not already exist.
SSL >> Group 1# access Enter access rule number: (1-1023) 1 Creating Access rule 1 Enter network name: Network_1 Enter service name: Service_1 Enter application specific name: Application_1 Enter action (accept/reject): accept -----------------------------------------------------------[Access rule 1 Menu] network - Set network reference service - Set service reference appspec - Set application specific reference action - Set action comment - Set access rule comment del - Remove access rule

Table 11-46 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Access Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage network <network_name> Enter the network name reference. service <service_name> Set the Service name reference. appspec <application_name> Set the application specific name reference. action accept|reject Accept or reject the creation of this Access rule. comment Create a description (comment) of this Access rule. del Delete the Access rule.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

591

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/linkset
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu
[Linksets Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-47 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Linkset Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured linksets. add <linkset_name> Add a linkset name. insert <position> <name> Insert a linkset into the linkset list. move <value> <value> Move the linkset from one position to another in the linkset list.

592

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend menu level, you are prompted to create an extended service profile if one does not already exist.
SSL >> Group 1# extend Enter profile number or name (1-63): 1 Creating Extended Profile 1 Enter client filter name: Filter_1 Enter user type (advanced/medium/novice): novice -----------------------------------------------------------[Extended Profile 1 Menu] filter - Set client filter reference access - Access rule menu print - Print access rules usertype - Set portal user type linkset - Linkset menu del - Remove profile

Table 11-48 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage filter <client_filter_name> Set the client filter name reference. access Go to the Access Rule menu. To view the menu options, see page 594. print Display the extended profile information. usertype advanced|medium|novice Set the portal user level. linkset Go to the Linkset menu. To view the menu options, see page 595. del Delete the Extended Profile.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

593

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend/access
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu
[Access rule 1 Menu] network - Set network reference service - Set service reference appspec - Set application specific reference action - Set action comment - Set access rule comment del - Remove access rule

Table 11-49 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Access Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage network <network_name> Set the network name reference. service <service_name> Set the Service name reference. appspec <application_name> Set the Application name reference.. action accept|reject Accept or reject the Access rule change. comment Create a description (comment) of the Access rule. del Delete the Extended Profile Access rule.

594

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/extend/ linkset
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu
[Linksets Menu] list del add insert move List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-50 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group Extend Profiles Linkset Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured Extended Profile linksets. del <extended_profile_linkset_name> Delete the Extended Profile Linkset. add <extended_profile_linkset_name> Add an Extended Profile linkset name. insert <position> <name> Insert an Extended Profile linkset into the linkset list. move <value> <value> Move the Extended Profile linkset from one position to another in the linkset list.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/group/ipsec
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu
[IPsec Menu] secret utunnel - Set shared secret - Set user tunnel profile

Table 11-51 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage secret <string> Set the group Secret value.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

595

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-51 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Group IPsec Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage utunnel <string> Set the user tunnel profile name.

596

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/ssodomains
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Enabled Domains Menu
[SSO Domain menu Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Table 11-52 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on enabled Domains Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the SSO domains. del <index> Delete an SSO domain. add <domain_name> <mode, normal|add_domain> Add an SSO domain.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/ssoheaders
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu
[SSO headers menu Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

Table 11-53 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured SSO Headers. del <SSO Headers_name> Delete the SSO Header.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

597

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-53 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Single-sign on Headers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <domain> <header_pattern> Add an SSO Header. insert <position> <domain> <header_name> Insert a SSO Header into the headers list. move <value> <value> Move the SSO Headers from one position to another in the SSO Headers list.

598

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu
[RADIUS Accounting servers vpnattribu ena dis Menu] RADIUS accounting servers menu VPN attribute menu Enable RADIUS accounting Disable RADIUS accounting

Table 11-54 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Radius servers menu. To view the menu options, see page 599. vpnattribu Go to the VPN attribute menu. To view the menu options, see page 601. ena enable|disable Enable AAA radius accounting. dis enable|disable Disable AAA radius accounting.

ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct/servers
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Servers Menu
[RADIUS Accounting list del add insert move Servers Menu] List all values Delete a value by number Add a new value Insert a new value Move a value by number

Table 11-55 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured Radius Accounting servers. del <Radius_Accounting_server_name> Delete the SSO Header.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

599

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-55 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add <ip_address> <port> <secret> Add a Radius Account. insert <position> <ip_address> <port> <secret> Insert a Radius account into the account list. move <value> <value> Move the Radius account from one position to another in the account list.

600

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

ssl/cfg/vpn/aaa/radacct/vpnattribu
SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu
[VPN Attribute Menu] vendorid - Set vendor id for the VPN attribute vendortype - Set vendor type for the VPN attribute

Table 11-56 SSL VPN Configuration AAA Radius Accounting VPN attributes Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage vendorid <vendorID> Set the vendor name. vendortype <integer> Set the vendor type.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server
SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu
[Server Menu] port dnsname trace ssl tcp http proxymap portal adv ena dis Set listen port of server Set DNS name of server Traffic trace menu SSL settings menu TCP endpoint settings menu HTTP settings menu Intranet proxy configuration menu Portal settings menu Advanced settings menu Enable virtual server Disable virtual server

Table 11-57 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage port <integer, 1-65534> Set the listen port of the server. dnsname <fully_qualified_DNS_name> Set the DNS name of the server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

601

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-57 SSL VPN Configuration Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage trace Go to the Trace menu. To view the menu options, see page 602. ssl Go to the SSL settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 603. tcp Go to the TCP endpoint settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 605. http Go to the HTTP settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 606. proxymap Go to the Intranet Proxy configuration menu. To view the menu options, see page 608. portal Go to the Portal menu. To view the menu options, see page 609. adv Go to the Advanced settings menu.To view the menu options, see page 609. ena enable|disable Enable the VPN server. dis enable|disable Disable the VPN server.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/trace
SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu
[Trace Menu] ssldump tcpdump ping dnslookup traceroute Create traffic dump Create traffic dump Ping through backend interface Lookup a name in DNS through backend interface traceroute through backend interface

Table 11-58 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ssldump Create an SSL traffic dump. See the tcpdump documentation for a desription of the patterns that are allowed. (http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html).

602

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-58 SSL VPN Configuration Server Traffic Trace Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage standalone on|off Create a TCP traffic dump. See the tcpdump documentation for a desription of the patterns that are allowed. (http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html) traceroute - traceroute through backend interface ping <hostname> Ping through the backend interface. dnslookup <hostname> Lookup a name in DNS through the backend interface. traceroute Traceroute through backend interface. Use this command to identify the route used for station-tostation connectivity across the network.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/ssl
SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu
[SSL Settings Menu] cert - Set server certificate cachesize - Set SSL cache size cachettl - Set SSL cache timeout cacerts - Set list of accepted signers of client certificates cachain - Set list of CA chain certificates protocol - Set protocol version ciphers - Set cipher list verify - Set certificate verification level ena - Enable SSL dis - Disable SSL

Table 11-59 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cert <certicate_nuber, 1 to 1500> Set the IP address of the VPN. cachesize <integer, 0 to 10000> Set the SSL cache size (kBytes). cachettl <integer> Set the SSL cache timeout (in minutes).

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

603

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-59 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cacerts <certificate_numbers> Set the list of accepted signers of client certificates. If more than one, use a comma to separate the entries. cachain <certificate_numbers> Set the list of CA chain certificates. If more than one, use a comma to separate the entries. protocol ssl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the protocol version. ciphers Set the cipher list. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. SSLv3:TLSv1). Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.g. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, - or +: ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.g. !RSA). - deletes the ciphers from the list, but the ciphers can be added again by later options. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. This option does not add any new ciphers. Additionally, the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. verify none|optional Set the certificate verification level. ena enable|disable Enable SSL. dis enable|disable Disable SSL.

604

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/tcp
SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint Settings Menu
[TCP Settings Menu] cwrite - Set ckeep - Set skeep - Set swrite - Set sconnect - Set csendbuf - Set crecbuf - Set ssendbuf - Set srecbuf - Set client TCP write timeout client TCP keep alive timeout socks client TCP keep alive heartbeat timeout server TCP write timeout server TCP connect timeout client TCP send buffer size client TCP receive buffer size server TCP send buffer size server TCP receive buffer size

Table 11-60 SSL VPN Configuration Server TCP endpoint settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ips <integer, 1 to 2147483647s> Set client TCP write timeout, in seconds. crecbuf - Set client TCP receive buffer size ssendbuf - Set server TCP send buffer size srecbuf - Set server TCP receive buffer size ckeep <integer, 1 to 2147483647s> Set client TCP keep alive timeout. skeep <integer, 1 to 2147483647s> Set the SOCKS client TCP keep alive heartbeat timeout. swrite <integer, 1 to 2147483647s> Set the server TCP write timeout. sconnect <integer, 1 to 2147483647s> Set the server TCP connect timeout. csendbuf auto|<integer, 2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP send buffer size (Bytes). crecbuf auto|<integer, 2000 to 100000> Set the client TCP receive buffer size (Bytes). ssendbuf auto|<integer, 2000 to 100000> Set the server TCP send buffer size (Bytes). srecbuf auto|<integer, 2000 to 100000> Set server TCP receive buffer size (Bytes).

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

605

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/http
SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP Settings Menu
[HTTP Settings Menu] downstatus - Set server down reply status rewrite - SSL triggered rewrite menu securecook - Set add secure option to session cookie sslheader - Add SSL header sslxheader - Add SSL header with serial in hex sslsidhead - Add SSL SID header addxfor - Add X-Forwarded-For header addvia - Add Via header addxisd - Add HTTP-X-ISD debug header addclicert - Add Client-Cert as a HTTP header addnostore - Add no-cache/no-store HTTP header allowimage - Allow image caching allowdoc - Allow document caching allowscrip - Set allow script caching allowica - Allow ICA file caching cmsie - Set MSIE session termination bug workaround maxrcount - Set max number of persistant client requests maxline - Set max line length

Table 11-61 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage downstatus unavailable|redirect|reset Set the server down reply status. rewrite on|off Go to the SSl triggered Rewrite menu. To view the menu options, see page 607. securecook on|off Set the “add secure” option for the session cookie. sslheader on|off Add an SSL session ID header. sslxheader on|off Add an SSL header with serial number in hexadecimal. sslsidhead on|off Add an SSL SID header. addxfor on|off|anonymous|remove Add X-Forwarded-For header.

606

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-61 SSL VPN Configuration Server HTTP settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage addvia on|off|anonymous|remove Set VIA header addxisd on|off Set HTTP-X-ISD debug header. addclicert on|off Set Client-Cert as a HTTP header. adddnostore on|off Set no-cache/no-store HTTP header. allowimage on|off Set image caching. allowdoc on|off Set document caching allowscrip on|off Set allow script caching. allowica on|off Set ICA file caching. cmsie on|off Set MSIE session termination bug workaround. maxrcount <integer> Set max number of persistant client requests. maxline <integer> Set the maximum line length.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/http/rewrite
SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu
[Rewrite Menu] rewrite ciphers response URI Set Set Set Set SSL triggered rewrite accepted ciphers source of response URI with the weak cipher alert

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

607

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-62 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL triggered rewrite Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage rewrite on|off Set SSL triggered rewrite. For step-up certificates we recommend ALL:-RC2:SHA1:@STRENGTH ciphers <string> Set the accepted ciphers. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. SSLv3:TLSv1). Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.g. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, - or +: ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.g. !RSA). - deletes the ciphers from the list, but the ciphers can be added again by later options. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. This option doesn't add any new ciphers it just moves matching existing ones. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. response iSD|WebServer Set the source of response. URI <WebServer response only> Set the URI with the weak cipher alert. For example, /cgi-bin/weakcipher.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/server/proxymap
SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu
The PROXY menu is not available for type portal and socks servers.
[Proxy Mapping Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

Table 11-63 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the server Intranet Proxy settings.

608

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-63 SSL VPN Configuration Server Intranet Proxy settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage del <Proxy_server_name> Delete the Intranet Proxy server. add <ip_address> <port> Add an Intranet Proxy server. insert <position> <ip_address> <port> Insert a Intranet Proxy server into the Proxy server list. move <value> <value> Move the Intranet Proxy server from one position to another in the server list.

ssl/cfg/vpn/server/portal
SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu
[Portal Settings resetcooki domain persistent Menu] - Set Re-Set session cookie in each request - Set cookie domain - Set use persistent session cookies

Table 11-64 SSL VPN Configuration Server Portal settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage resetcoolki on|off Set the Reset session cookie in each request. domain <domain_name> Set the cookie domain name for the portal. persistent on|off Set the use of persistent session cookies.

ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv
SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu
[Advanced Settings Menu] traflog - UDP syslog Traffic Log menu sslconnect - SSL connect menu

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

609

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-65 SSL VPN Configuration Server Advanced Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage traflog <IP_address> Go to the UDP syslog Traffic Log menu. To view the menu options, see page 610. sslconnect on|off Go to the SSL Connect menu. To view the menu options, see page 611.

ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/traflog
SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu
[Traffic Log Settings Menu] sysloghost - Set syslog host IP udpport - Set syslog portnumber priority - Set syslog priority facility - Set syslog facility ena - Enable traffic UDP syslog logging dis - Disable traffic UDP syslog logging

Table 11-66 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage sysloghost <IP_address> Set the IP address of the VPN. udpport <UDP_port_number> Set the standalone mode. priority <syslog_name> Set the syslog priority. facility <string> Set the syslog facility. ena enable|disable Enable traffic UDP syslog messaging. dis Disable traffic UDP syslog messaging.

610

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/sslconnect
SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Menu
[SSL Connect Settings Menu] protocol - Set protocol version cert - Set client certificate ciphers - Set accepted ciphers for ssl connect verify - Verify server menu

Table 11-67 SSL VPN Configuration Server UDP Syslog Traffic Log Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage protocol ssl2|ssl3|ssl23|tls1 Set the Protocol version. cert <certicate_number, 1 to 1500> Set the client certificate. ciphers Set the accepted ciphers for SSL connection. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons (e.g. SSLv3:TLSv1). Lists of cipher suites can be combined using a logical and operation (+) (e.g. SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and the DES algorithms). Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, - or +. ! permanently delets the ciphers from the list (e.g. !RSA). - deletes the ciphers from the list, but the ciphers can be added again by later options. + moves the ciphers to the end of the list. Additionally the cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of encryption algorithm key length. verify Go to the Verify server menu. To view the menu options, see page 612.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

611

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

ssl/cfg/vpn/server/adv/sslconnect/ verify
SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect verify Server Menu
[SSL Connect Verify Settings Menu] verify - Set certificate verification level commonname - Set server common name cacerts - Set list of accepted signers server's certificate

Table 11-68 SSL VPN Configuration Server SSL Connect Verify Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage verify none|verify Set the Certicate Verication level. commonname <string> Set the server common name. cacerts <certicate_numbers> Set the list of accepted signers for each server certificate. If more than one, use a comma to separate each entry.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server Menu
[IPsec Menu] ena dis quick ikeprof utunprof cacerts cert - Enable IPsec - Disable IPsec - Quick IPsec setup wizard - IKE profile - User tunnel profile - Set list of accepted signers of clients certificate - Set server certificate

Table 11-69 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable IPsec.

612

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-69 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage dis [enable|disable] Disable IPsec. quick Use the Quick IPsec setup wizard. For example: SSL >> IPsec# quick Do you want to use IPsec Group login? (yes/no) [no]: n Lower IP address in pool range: 0.0.0.0 Upper IP address in pool range: 1.1.1.1 Enabled IPsec Creating IKE Profile 1 Name: vpn_1_1 Creating User Tunnel Profile 1 Name: vpn_1_1 You should create a AAA group for the user tunnel profile Enabled Pool Use apply to activate the changes ikeprof Go to the IKE profile menu. utunprof Set the User tunnel profile. cacerts Set the list of accepted signers of clients certificate. cert Set the server certicate.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

613

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Menu
[IKE Profile 1 Menu] name - Set IKE profile name del - Remove IKE Profile enc - Encryption mask menu dh - Diffie-Hellman group mask menu pfs - Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy initcontac - Accept ISAKMP initial contact payload rekeytime - Set rekey time limit rekeytraf - Set rekey traffic limit retransmit - Set ISAKMP retransmit interval maxretrans - Set ISAKMP max attempts retransmits replaywins - Set replay window size nat - NAT menu deadpeer - Dead peer menu

Table 11-70 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the IKE profile name. del <IKE_profile_name> Disable IPsec. enc Go to the Encryption mask menu.To view the menu options, see page 615. dh Go to the Diffie_Hellman group mask menu. To view the menu options, see page 616. pfs on|off Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy. initcontac on|off Accept ISAKMP intitial contact payload. rekeytime <integer> Set the rekey time limit, in seconds. rekeytraf <integer> Set rekey traffic limit, in KBytes. retransmit <integer> Set ISAKMP retransmit limit, in seconds.

614

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-70 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage maxretrans <integer> Set the maximum ISAKMP attempts to retransmit. replaywins <integer> Set replay window size. nat Go to the NAT menu.To view the menu options, see page 617. deadpeer Go to the Dead Peer menu.To view the menu options, see page 617.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/enc
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu
[Encryption Menu] hmac_md5 hmac_sha null_md5 null_sha des_md5 des_sha 3des_md5 3des_sha aes_128_sh Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set HMAC with MD5 HMAC with SHA NULL with MD5 NULL with SHA DES with MD5 DES with SHA 3DES with MD5 3DES with SHA 128 bits AES with SHA

Table 11-71 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage hmac_md5 on|off Set HMAC with MD5. hmac_sha on|off Set HMAC with SHA. null_md5 on|off Set NULL with MD5. null_sha on|off Set NULL with SHA.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

615

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-71 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Encryption Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage des_md5 on|off Set DES with MD5. des_sha on|off Set DES with SHA. 3des_md5 on|off Set 3DES with MD5. 3des_sha on|off Set 3DES with SHA. aes_128_sh on|off Set 128 bits AES with SHA.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/dh
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile DiffieHellman Group Mask Menu
[Diffie-Hellman Group Menu] dh1 - Set Diffie-Hellman group 1 dh2 - Set Diffie-Hellman group 2 dh5 - Set Diffie-Hellman group 5

Table 11-72 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Diffie-Hellman Group Mask Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage dh1 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 1. dh2 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 2. dh5 on|off Set Diffie_Hellman group 5.

616

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/NAT
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile NAT Menu
[NAT Menu] natdetect timeout keepalive - Set ESP UDP NAT detect - Set detect timeout - Set keepalive timeout

Table 11-73 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile NAT Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage natdetect disabled|auto|ipsec_capable|use_udp_encap Set ESP UDP detection. timeout <integer> Set the detection timeout, in seconds. keepalive <integer> Set the keepalive timeout, in seconds.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ipsec/ikeprof/deadpeer
SSL VPN Configuration IPsec Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu
[Dead Peer Menu] ena dis interval retransmit Enable dead peer detection Disable dead peer detection Set detect interval Set max retransmissions

Table 11-74 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable dead peer detection. dis [enable|disable] Disable dead peer detection.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

617

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-74 SSL VPN Configuration IPSEC Server IKE Profile Dead Peer Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage interval <integer> Set the detection interval, in seconds. retransmit <integer> Set the maximum number retransmissions.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/ippool
SSL VPN Configuration IP Pool Menu
[Pool Menu] ena dis lowerip upperip proxyarp info Enable pool Disable pool Set lower IP in pool range Set upper IP in pool range Set proxy arp on clean side interfaces Print alloc info for this VPN

Table 11-75 SSL VPN Configuration IP IPool Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena enable|disable Enable the IP Pool. dis enable|disable Disable the IP Pool. lowerip <lower_IP_address> Set the lower IP address in the pool range. upperip <upper_IP_address> Set the upper IP address in the pool range. proxyarp on|off|all Set proxy ARP on clean side interfaces. info Display all of the IP Pool configuration information.

618

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu
[Portal Menu] import restore banner redirect logintext iconmode linktext linkurl linkcols linkwidth companynam colors faccess lang wiper ieclear whitelist citrix Import banner image gif Restores default Nortel banner Show installed banner file Set redirect URL Set static text on login page Set Home tab icon mode Set static text on link page Set url input field on link page Set number of columns on home tab Set width of link columns on home tab Set company name used on portal pages Portal colors menu Full Access menu Portal language menu Set use ActiveX component for clearing cache Set use IE ClearAuthCache White-list settings menu Set Citrix support

Table 11-76 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage import [<protocol> <hostname> <bannerfilename>] Import banner image gif. For example: SSL >> Portal# import Select protocol (tftp/ftp/scp/sftp) [tftp]: ftp Enter hostname or IP address of server: 0.0.0.0 Enter filename on server: nortel_banner.gif restore Restores default Nortel banner. banner Show installed banner file. redirect <URL> Set redirect URL. logintext Set static text on login page. Write or paste the text to show up in the Login window, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. iconmode clean|fancy Set Home tab icon mode.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

619

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-76 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage linktext [<string>] Set static text on link page. Write or paste the text, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. linkurl on|off Set URL input field on link page. linkcols [<integer>] Set number of columns on home tab. Four can be considered a practical maximum. linkwidth [auto|0 to 100%] Set width of link columns on home tab. companynam [<string>] Set company name used on portal pages. colors Go to the Portal Colors menu.To view the menu options, see page 621. faccess Go to the Full Access menu. To view the menu options, see page 621. lang Go to the Portal language menu. To view the menu options, see page 622. wiper [on|off] Set use ActiveX component for clearing cache. ieclear [on|off] Set use IE ClearAuthCache. whitelist Go to the White-list settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 623. citrix [on|off] Set Citrix support.

620

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/colors
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu
[Portal Colors Menu] color1 - Set portal color color2 - Set portal color color3 - Set portal color color4 - Set portal color theme - Color theme 1 2 3 4

Table 11-77 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Colors Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage color1 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 1. For example, #003399 for blue. color2 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 2. color3 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 3. color4 [<HTML_color_syntax>] Set Portal color 4. theme [default|aqua|apple|jeans|cinnamon|candy] Set the color theme.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/faccess
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu
[Full Access Menu] ena - Enable 'Full Access' tab dis - Disable 'Full Access' tab ipsecmode - Set IPSEC Mode contip - Set Contivity IP address contid - Set Contivity group ID contpass - Set Contivity group password portalmsg - Set text in 'Full Access' portal tab appletmsg - Set text in 'Full Access' Applet window

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

621

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-78 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Full Access Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena [enable|disable] Enable 'Full Access' tab. dis [enable|disable] Disable 'Full Access' tab. ipsecmode [contivity|native] Set the IPSEC Mode. contip [<IP_address>] Set Contivity IP address. contid [<string>] Set the Contivity group ID. contpass [<string>] Set a Contivity group password. portalmsg Set text in 'Full Access' portal tab. Write or paste the text to show up in the Full Access Portal window, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. appletmsg Set text in 'Full Access' Applet window. Write or paste text to show up in the Full Access Applet window, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate. If you *only* enter "..." a default text will be generated.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/lang
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu
[Portal Language setlang charset list Menu] - Set the language to be used in the portal - Print charset in use - List supported languages

Table 11-79 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ips [<ISO 639 Language Code>] Set the language to be used in the portal. For English, enter en.

622

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-79 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Language Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage charset on|off Display the current character set. For example: Charset = iso-8859-1 list Display all of the pre-defined languages.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/whitelist
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu
[White-list Settings Menu] domains - Configure white-list domains ena - Enable URL rewrite white-list dis - Disable URL rewrite white-list

Table 11-80 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage domains Go to the Domains menu. To view the menu options, see page 623. ena [enable|disable] Enable URL re-write whitelist. dis [enable|disable] Disable URL re-write whitelist.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/portal/whitelist/ domains
SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu
[White-list menu Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

623

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-81 SSL VPN Configuration Portal Whitelist settings Domains Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list Go to the Domains menu. To view the menu options, see page 621. del [<index>] Delete a value. add [<domain_name>] Add a domain.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset
SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset menu level, you are prompted to create a linkset if one does not already exist.
SSL >> VPN 1# linkset Enter Linkset number or name (1-1023): 1 Creating Linkset 1 Linkset name: Linkset_1 Linkset text (HTML syntax, eg <b>A heading</b>): html Autorun Linkset (true/false) [false]: false -----------------------------------------------------------[Linkset 1 Menu] name - Set linkset name text - Set linkset text autorun - Set autorun support link - Link menu del - Remove tunnel

Table 11-82 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name <string> Set the linkset name. text [<text_type>] Set the text type. In the current release, only HTML is available (default). autorun [true|false>] Set the autorun linkset option.

624

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-82 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage link Go to the Link menu. To view the menu options, see page 625. del [<linkset_number>] Remove the linkset.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link
SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link menu level, you are prompted to create a link if one does not already exist.
SSL >> Linkset 1# link Enter Link number or name (1-1023): 1 Creating Link 1 Enter link text: Link_1 Enter type of link (hit TAB to see possible values) [internal]: <tab> smb ftp proxy custom mail telnet netdrive wts outlook netdirect terminal external internal eauto iauto Enter type of link (hit TAB to see possible values) [internal]: internal Entering: Internal settings menu Enter method (http/https): http Enter host (eg inside.company.com): NoTel.ca Enter path (eg /): /info Leaving: Internal settings menu -----------------------------------------------------------[Link 1 Menu] move - Move link text - Set link text type - Set link type internal - Internal settings menu del - Remove link

Table 11-83 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage move [<link_number>] Move the link.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

625

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-83 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage text [<link_name>] Set the name of the link. type [link_type>] Set the link type. See the list of link types on page 625. internal Go to the Internal link menu. To view the menu options, see page 626. del [<link_number>] Remove the link.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/linkset/link/internal
SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Setting Menu
[Internal menu Menu] quick - Quick internal link wizard

Table 11-84 SSL VPN Configuration Linkset Link Internal Settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage quick Configure the link using the internal link wizard. For example: SSL >> Internal menu# quick Enter method (http/https): http Enter host (eg inside.company.com): NoTel.ca Enter path (eg /): /

/ssl/cfg/vpn/sslclient
SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu
[SSL VPN Client Menu] netdirect - Allow Netdirect client xmlconfig - Set XML client configuration

626

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-85 SSL VPN Configuration SSL Client Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage netdirect [on|off] Allow a Netdirect VPN client. xmlconfig Set the XML client configuration. Write or paste the text, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..."(without the quotation marks) to terminate.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/adv
SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu
[Advanced Menu] interface dns log - Set backend interface used by VPN - DNS settings menu - Set log settings

Table 11-86 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage interface [<backend_interface_number>] Set the backend interface. dns Go to the DNS settings menu. To view the menu options, see page 627. log [all|login|http|portal|reject|socks] Set the log option.

/ssl/cfg/vpn/adv/dns
SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DNS settings Menu
[DNS Settings Menu] search - Set DNS search list

Table 11-87 SSL VPN Configuration Advanced DN S settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage search [<domain_names>] Set the domain search list. If more than one domain, use a comma to separate each entry.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

627

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys
SSL Configuration System Menu
[System Menu] mip host routes time dns rsa syslog accesslist adm user distrace Set management IP (MIP) address iSD host menu Routes menu Date and time menu DNS settings RSA Servers Syslog servers menu Access list menu Administrative applications menu User Access Control menu Disable tracing with tcpdump/ssldump

Table 11-88 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage mip [<IP_address>] Set the management IP (MIP) address. host Go to the Host menu. To view menu options, see page 629. routes Go to the Routes menu. To view menu options, see page 630. time Go to the Time menu. To view menu options, see page 634. dns Go to the Time menu. To view menu options, see page 634. rsa Go to the RSA server menu. To view menu options, see page 636. syslog Go to the RSA server menu. To view menu options, see page 636. accesslist Go to the Access List menu. To view menu options, see page 637. adm Go to the Administrative Applcations menu.To view menu options, see page 638. user Go to the Administrative Applcations menu.To view menu options, see page 647.

628

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-88 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage distrace [yes|no] Deactivate trace. Trace cannot be reactivated during the session.

/ssl/cfg/sys/host
SSL Configuration System Host Menu
[iSD Host 1 Menu] type ip license gateway routes interface port ports hwplatform halt reboot delete Set type of the iSD Set IP address Set License Set default gateway address Routes menu iSD host interface menu iSD port configuration menu Display physical ports Display hardware platform Halt the iSD Reboot the iSD Remove iSD Host

Table 11-89 SSL Configuration System Host Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage type [master|slave] Set the iSD type. ip [<IP_address>] Set the IP address of the host. license [<string>] Enter or paste the host license information. Paste the license, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate.. gateway [<IP_address>] Set default gateway address. routes Go to the Routes menu. To view menu options, see page 633. interface Go to the iSD host interface menu. To view menu options, see page 631. port Go to the iSD port configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 632.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

629

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-89 SSL Configuration System Host Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ports Display the number of physical ports. hwplatform Display hardware platform. halt [yes|no] Halt the iSD platform. reboot [yes|no] Reboot the iSD. delete [<hostname>] Remove iSD Host.

/ssl/cfg/sys/host/routes
SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu
[Host Routes Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Table 11-90 SSL Configuration System Host Routes Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all host routes. del [<route_number>] Delete a route by its number. add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add a route.

630

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/host/interface
SSL Configuration System Host Menu
[Host Interface 1 Menu] ip - Set IP address netmask - Set network mask gateway - Set default gateway address routes - Routes menu vlanid - Set VLAN tag id mode - Set mode ports - Interface ports menu primary - Set primary port delete - Remove Host Interface

Table 11-91 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ip [<IP_address>] Set the host inteface IP address. netmask [<IP_address>] Set the inteface netmask. gateway [<IP_address>] Set the Gateway IP address. routes Go to the Routes menu. To view menu options, see page 632. vlanid [<integer>] Set the VLAN tag ID. mode [failover|trunking] Set the interface mode. ports Go to the Ports menu. To view menu options, see page 633. primary [<port_number>] Set the Primary port. delete [<interafce_hostname>] Delete the interface.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

631

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/host/interface/routes
SSL Configuration System Host Interface Routes Menu
[Host Interface Routes Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Table 11-92 SSL Configuration System Host Interface Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured interface routes. del [<route_number>] Delete an interface route. add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add an interface route.

/ssl/cfg/sys/host/port
SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu
[Host Port 1 Menu] autoneg - Set autonegotiation speed - Set Speed mode - Set full or half duplex mode

Table 11-93 SSL Configuration System Host Port Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage autoneg <on | off> Enables or disables autonegotiation on the port. The default is on. speed <10 | 100 | 1000> Sets the port speed in Mbits per second when autonegotiation is not in use. mode <full | half> Sets the duplex mode of the port when autonegotiation is not in use. When autonegotiation is not in use the default mode is full.

632

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/routes
SSL Configuration System Menu
[Routes Menu] list del add - List all values - Delete a value by number - Add a new value

Table 11-94 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the configured routes. del [<route_number>] Delete a route. This command removes the specified static route from the system configuration. Use the list command to display the index numbers of all added static routes. add [<destination> <netmask> <gateway>] Add a static route.

/ssl/cfg/sys/time
SSL Configuration System Time Menu
[Date and Time Menu] date - Set system date time - Set system time tzone - Set Timezone ntp - Configure NTP servers

Table 11-95 SSL Configuration System Time Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage date [YYYY-MM-DD] Enter the date. time [HH:MM:SS] Set the time, using a 24-hour clock scheme. tzone [<continent_number> <country_number> <region_number>] Set the time zone. ntp Configure NTP servers. To view menu options, see page 634.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

633

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/time/ntp
SSL Configuration System Time NTP servers Menu
[NTP Servers Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Table 11-96 SSL Configuration System Time NTP Servers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List the configured NTP servers. del [<NTP_server>] Delete the NTP server. Removes the specified NTP server from the system configuration. Use the list command to display the index numbers of all added NTP servers.. add [<IP_address>] Add an NTP server. Adds an NTP server to the system configuration. The NTP server you add is used by the NTP client on the iSD to synchronize its clock. NTP should have access to a number of servers (at least three) in order to compensate for any discrepancies in the servers.

/ssl/cfg/sys/dns
SSL Configuration System DNS settings Menu
[DNS Settings Menu] servers - DNS cachesize - Set retransmit - Set count - Set ttl - Set health - Set hdown - Set hup - Set servers menu Local DNS cache size DNS Retransmit interval timer DNS Retransmit counter Max TTL Health check interval Health check down counter Health check up counter

Table 11-97 SSL Configuration System DNS Settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the DNS Servers menu. To view menu options, see page 635. cachesize [<integer>] Set the DNS cache size in kBytes.

634

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-97 SSL Configuration System DNS Settings Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage retransmit [<integer>] Set the DNS retransmit interval timer value, in seconds. count [<integer>] Set the DNS Retransmit counter value. ttl [<integer>] Set the maximum TTL, in seconds. health [<integer>] Set Health check interval. hdown [<integer>] Set Health check down counter hup [<integer>] Set Health check up counter

sl/cfg/sys/dns/servers
SSL Configuration System DNS Servers settings Menu
[DNS Servers Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

Table 11-98 SSL Configuration System DNS Servers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the DNS server settings. del <DNS_server_name> Delete the DNS server. add <ip_address> Add a DNS server. insert <position> <ip_address> Insert a DNS server into the DNS server list. move <value> <value> Move the DNS server from one position to another in the server list.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

635

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/rsa
SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/rsa menu level, you are prompted to create an RSA server if one does not already exist.
SSL >> System# rsa Enter RSA Server number or name: (1-255) 1 Creating RSA Servers 1 RSA server symbolic name: RSA_1 -----------------------------------------------------------[RSA Servers 1 Menu] rsaname - Set RSA server symbolic name import - Import sdconf.rec file rmnodesecr - Remove Node Secret del - Remove RSA server

Table 11-99 SSL Configuration System RSA servers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage rsname <string>] Set the RSA server symbolic name. import [<protocol> <host> <file>] Import a sdconf.rec file. rmnodesecr [<node_secret_name>] Remove a Node Secret. del Remove an RSA server.

/ssl/cfg/sys/syslog
SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu
[Syslog Servers Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

636

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-100 SSL Configuration System SysLog Servers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the Syslog server settings. del <Syslog_server_name> Delete the Syslog server. add <ip_address> Add a Syslog server. insert [<position> <ip_address> <local_facility>] Insert a Syslog server into the Syslog server list. move <value> <value> Move the Syslog server from one position to another in the server list. Moves a syslog server up or down in the list of configured servers. The index numbers you specify must be in use. To view all syslog servers currently added to the system configuration, use the list command.

/ssl/cfg/sys/accesslist
SSL Configuration System Access List Menu
[Access List Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value

Table 11-101 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List the accesslist values. del [<acces_list_number>] Delete an accesslist. add Add a new value to the accesslist. Adds a single machine, or a range of machines on a specific network, to the access list. Only those machines listed will be allowed to access the iSD host via a Telnet or SSH connection (assuming that Telnet or SSH connections, or both, are enabled).

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

637

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu
[Administrative Applications Menu] snmp - SNMP menu clitimeout - Set CLI idle timeout audit - Audit Settings Menu auth - Authentication menu telnet - Set telnet CLI access ssh - Set SSH CLI access http - HTTP access menu https - HTTPS access menu sshkeys - SSH host keys menu

Table 11-102 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage snmp Go to the SNMP menu. To view menu options, see page 639. clitimeout [<integer>] Set the CLI idle timeout value, in seconds. audit Go to the Audit menu. To view menu options, see page 643. telnet Set the telnet CLI access. Enables or disables Telnet access. When set to on and not having added machine(s) to the access list, all Telnet connections are allowed. When set to on and having added machine(s) to the access list, only the specified machine(s) are allowed Telnet access. When set to off, all Telnet connections are rejected, including connections from machine(s) added to the access list. The default Telnet setting is off. ssh Set the SSH CLI access. Enables or disables SSH access. When set to on and not having added machine(s) to the access list, all SSH connections are allowed. When set to on and having added machine(s) to the access list, only the specified machine(s) are allowed SSH access. When set to off, all SSH connections are rejected, including connections from machine(s) added to the access list. The default SSH setting is off.

638

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-102 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage http Go to the HTTP access menu. To view menu options, see page 644. https Go to the HTTP access menu. To view menu options, see page 645. sshkeys Go to the HTTP access menu. To view menu options, see page 646.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu
[SNMP Menu] ena dis versions snmpv2-mib community users target Enable SNMP Disable SNMP Set SNMP versions supported SNMPv2-MIB menu SNMP community menu SNMP USM Users Menu Notification target menu

Table 11-103 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ena [true|false] Enable SNMP. dis [true|false] Disable SNMP. versions [<SNMP_version_number>] Set the SNMP version, such as v1. snmpv2-mib Go to the SNMPv2-MIB menu.To view menu options, see page 640. community Go to the SNMP community menu. To view menu options, see page 640. users Go to the SNMP USM Users community menu. To view menu options, see page 641.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

639

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-103 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage target Go to the Notification target menu. To view menu options, see page 642.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/snmpv2-mib
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2 MIB SNMP Menu
[SNMPv2-MIB Menu] sysContact sysName sysLocatio snmpEnable Set Set Set Set sysContact sysName sysLocation snmpEnableAuthenTraps

Table 11-104 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMPv2MIB Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage sysContact [<name_of_a_person>] Set a system contact name. Designates a contact person for the managed iSD cluster, together with information on how to contact this person. sysName [<string, iSD_cluster_name>] Assign a name to the managed iSD cluster. sysLocatio [<string>] Set the system location. snmpEnable [<SNMP_trap_value>] Set the snmpEnableAuthenTraps value.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/community
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu
[SNMP Community Menu] read - Set Read Community String write - Set Write Community String trap - Set Trap Community String

640

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-105 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Community Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage read [<string>] Set the Read Community String. Specifies the monitor community name that grants read access to the Management Information Base (MIB). If no monitor community name is specified, read access is not granted. The default monitor community name is public write [<string>] Set the Write Community String. Specifies the control community name that grants read and write access to the Management Information Base (MIB). If no control community name is specified, neither write nor read access is granted. trap [<string>] Set the Trap Community String. Specifies the trap community name that accompanies trap messages sent to the SNMP manager. If no trap community name is specified, the sending of trap messages is disabled. The default trap community name is trap

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/users
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/users menu level, you are prompted to create a userID if one does not already exist.
Enter user number or name: (1-1023) 1 Creating SNMP User 1 User name: Maint_Chief Enter security level (none/auth/priv) [priv]: priv Enter permission (list of get,set,trap): get Enter auth password: <password> Enter priv password: <password> -----------------------------------------------------------[SNMP User 1 Menu] name - Set user name seclevel - Set Security level permission - Set Permission authpasswd - Set Authentication Password privpasswd - Set Encryption Password del - Remove SNMP User

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

641

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-106 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Users Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage name [<string>] Set the user name. seclevel [none|auth|priv] Set the user Security level. permission [get|set|trap] Set user Permission. authpasswd [<string>] Set the Authentication Password. privpasswd [<string>] Set the Encryption Password. del [<SNMP_user_ID>] Remove the SNMP User.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/target
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu
To enter the /ssl/cfg/sys/adm/snmp/target menu level, you are prompted to create a target if one does not already exist.
SSL >> SNMP# target Enter Notification Target number: (1-) 1 Creating Notification Target 1 Enter target ip: 0.0.0.0 Enter snmp version (v1/v2c/v3): v1 -----------------------------------------------------------[Notification Target 1 Menu] ip - Set target IP address port - Set target port version - Set SNMP version del - Remove Notification Target

642

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-107 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SNMP Target Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage ip [<IP_address] Set the target IP address. port [<port_number] Disable SNMP. version [v1|v2|v3] Set the SNMP version. del Delete the SNMP target.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/audit
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu
[Audit Menu] servers vendorid vendortype ena dis RADIUS Servers Menu Set vendor id for audit attribute Set vendor type for audit attribute Enable Audit Disable Audit

Table 11-108 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage servers Go to the Servers menu. To view menu options, see page 644. vendorid [<string>] Set the vendor ID. vendortype [<integer>] Set the vendor type. ena [<true|false>] Enable Audit. dis[<true|false>] Disable audit.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

643

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/audit/servers
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu
[RADIUS Audit Servers Menu] list - List all values del - Delete a value by number add - Add a new value insert - Insert a new value move - Move a value by number

Table 11-109 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Audit Servers Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the Audit server settings. del <Audit_server_name> Delete the Audit server. add [<IP_address> <port> <secret>] Add an Audit server. insert [<position> <IP_address> <port> <secret>] Insert a Audit server into the Audit server list. move <value> <value> Move the Audit server from one position to another in the server list.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/http
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu
[HTTP Menu] port ena dis - Set HTTP Server port - Enable server - Disable server

644

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-110 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTP Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage port [<integer>] Set the HTTP server port. ena [true|false] Enable the HTTP server. dis [true|false] Disable the HTTP server.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/https
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu
[HTTPS Menu] port ena dis - Set HTTPS Server port - Enable server - Disable server

Table 11-111 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications HTTPS Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage port [<integer>] Set the HTTPS server port. ena [true|false] Enable the HTTPS server. dis [true|false] Disable the HTTPS server.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

645

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/sshkeys
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu
[SSH Host Keys generate show knownhosts Menu] - Generate new SSH host keys for the cluster - Show current SSH host keys for the cluster - SSH known host keys menu

Table 11-112 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Host keys Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage generate [yes|no] Generate new SSH host keys for the server cluster. show Show the SSH host keys for the server cluster. knownhosts Go to the Known Host Keys menu. To view menu options, see page 644.

/ssl/cfg/sys/adm/sshkeys/knownhosts
SSL Configuration System Administrative applications SSH Known Host keys Menu
[SSH Known Host Keys Menu] list - List known SSH keys of remote hosts del - Delete known SSH host key by index add - Add a new SSH host key import - Retrieve SSH key from remote host

Table 11-113 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Known SSH Host keys Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list [yes|no] Display the known SSH keys of remote hosts. del [<hostkey_name>] Delete a host key.

646

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-113 SSL Configuration System Administrative applications Known SSH Host keys Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage add Add a new SSH host key. Paste the key, press Enter to create a new line, and then type "..." (without the quotation marks) to terminate import [<hostname_or_IP_address>] Retrieve an SSH key from a remote host.

/ssl/cfg/sys/user
SSL Configuration System Menu
[User Menu] passwd expire list del add edit caphrase Change own password Set password expire time interval List all users Delete a user Add a new user Edit a user menu Certadmin export passphrase

Table 11-114 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage passwd Change your current login password. The password can contain spaces and is case respective. expire [DDdHHhMMmSS] Set the password expiry time and date. list List all user accounts. del Delete a user ID. Removes the specified user account from the system. Of the three built-in users (admin, oper, and root) only the oper user can be deleted. Only users with Administrator rights can delete user accounts. add [<string>] Add a new user ID. After a user account is added, you must also assign the user account to a group. Only users with Administrator rights can add user accounts. edit Go to the Edit a user menu. To view menu options, see page 648.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

647

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-114 SSL Configuration System Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage caphrase [<string>] Set the Certadmin export passphrase.

/ssl/cfg/sys/user/edit
SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu
[User User_1 Menu] groups - Groups menu cur - Display current setting

Table 11-115 SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage groups Go to theGroups menu. To view menu options, see page 551. cur Display the user configurations.

/ssl/cfg/sys/user/edit/groups
SSL Configuration System User Edit Menu
[Groups Menu] list del add - List all values - Delete a value by number - Add a new value

Table 11-116 SSL Configuration System User Edit Groups Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage list List all of the user groups information. del [<user_group_name>] Delete a user group. add [<string, user_group_name>] Add a user group.

648

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/cfg/lang
SSL Configuration Language Support Menu
[Language Support Menu] import - Import language definition file export - Export language definition template list - List the loaded languages vlist - List ISO 639 language codes del - Delete (custom) language definition

Table 11-117 SSL Configuration System Language Support Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage import [<protocol> <host> <filename> <ISO_language_code>] Import a language definition file from another host. export[<protocol> <host> <filename>] Export a language definition file. list [<language_number>] List the pre-defined languages that have been loaded. vlist [<language_shortform>] List the ISO 639 language codes. If a language_shortform argument is used (e.g., en for English), all of the codes that contain the argument characters are listed. del [<language_deinition_filename>] Delete a language definition.

/ssl/boot
SSL Boot Menu
[Boot Menu] software halt reboot delete Software management menu Halt the iSD Reboot the iSD Delete the iSD

Table 11-118 SSL Configuration Boot Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage software Go to Software Management menu. To view menu options, see page 651.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

649

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

Table 11-118 SSL Configuration Boot Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage halt Halt the iSD. The command stops the particular iSD host to which you have connected by Telnet, SSH, or a console connection. Always use this command before turning off the device. If you are connected by Telnet or SSH to the Management IP address (MIP), use the halt command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #) instead. reboot Reboot the iSD. The command reboots the particular iSD host to which you have connected by Telnet, SSH or a console connection. If you are connected by Telnet or SSH to the Management IP address (MIP), use the reboot command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #) instead. delete Delete an iSD host. Resets the particular iSD host to which you have connected via Telnet, SSH, or a console connection, to its factory default configuration (all IP configuration is lost). The software itself will remain intact. After having performed a delete, you can only access the device via a console connection. Log in as the admin user with the admin password to enter the Setup menu.

NOTE – Note: If you receive a warning that the iSD you are trying to delete has no contact with any (other) master iSD in the cluster, connect to the MIP address by Telnet or SSH and delete the iSD from the cluster by using the delete command in the iSD Host menu (/cfg/sys/cluster/host #).
The /boot/delete command is primarily intended for situations when you want to delete an iSD host that has either become isolated from the cluster, or has been physically removed from the cluster without first performing the delete command from the iSD Host menu. Under these circumstances, you must use the /boot/delete command to present the Setup menu, from which you can perform the new and join commands.

650

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/boot/software
SSL Performance Menu
[Software Management Menu] cur - Display current software status activate - Select software version to run download - Download new software pkg. via TFTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP del - Remove unpacked/old releases

Table 11-119 SSL Perfomance Software Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage cur Display the current software status. For example: SSL >> Software Management# cur Version Name ---------4.1.1.11 SSL 5.0.0.34 SSL activate [<software_version>] Select the software version to run. download [<protocol> <host> <filename>] Download a new software package. del [<software_version>] Remove old software releases. Removes a software upgrade package that has been downloaded by using the tftp or ftp command, in case you do not want to activate the unpacked software upgrade package. Only software versions whose status is indicated as unpacked (using the cur command) can be removed. Status -----old permanent

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

651

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/maint
SSL Performance Maintenance Menu
[Maintenance Menu] hsm - HSM menu dumplogs - Tech suppt dump log files to TFTP/FTP/SFTP server dumpstat - Tech suppt dump curr. status to TFTP/FTP/SFTP server chkcfg - Check applied configuration starttrace - Start Trace stoptrace - Stop Trace

Table 11-120 SSL Perfomance Maintenance Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage hsm Go to the HSM menu. To view menu options, see page 653. dumplogs Dump the log files. System log file information is collected from the iSD host you are connected to (or optionally, all iSD hosts in the cluster) and sends the information to a file in the gzip compressed tar format on the TFTP server you have specified. The information can then be used for technical support purposes. The file sent to the TFTP server does not contain any sensitive information related to the system configuration, such as certificates, private keys, and so on. dumpstat Dump the current status. Th current system internal status is collected from the iSD host you are connected to (or optionally, all iSD hosts in the cluster) and sends the information to a file in the gzip compressed tar format on the TFTP server you have specified. The information can then be used for technical support purposes. chkcfg [all-isds | one-isd] [item...] Check the applied configuration. starttrace [<tags>] [<VPN>] Start trace. Valid tags are all, aaa, dns, ike, ipsec, ippool, ssl, tg, pptp, upref, netdirect, net and direct_packet. stoptrace Stop the Trace.

652

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

/ssl/maint/hsm
SSL Performance HSM Menu
The /ssl/maint/hsm menu is only available to HSM enabled iSDs.
[HSM Menu] login - Login to HSM cards on local iSD splitkey - Split a wrap key onto CODE iKeys changepass - Change iKey password

Table 11-121 SSL Perfomance Maintenance HSM Menu Options
Command Syntax and Usage login <HSM-USER password for the currently inserted HSM-USER iKey> Lets you log in to a HSM card, using the HSM-USER iKey and the correct password. splitkey Splits the wrap key used by the hardware security module onto the two black CODE iKeys. changepass <card number [0 | 1]> <iKey [HSM-SO | HSM-USER]> <current password for the selected iKey> <new password for the selected iKey> Sets the password for a HSM-SO or a HSM-USER iKey.

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

653

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

654

Chapter 11: The SSL Processor Menu
320506-A, January 2006

APPENDIX A

Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address>

655
320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

656 Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages

320506-A, January 2006

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports

320506-A, January 2006

Appendix A: Nortel Application Switch Operating System Syslog Messages 657

Nortel Application Switch Operating System 23.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no